JP6748571B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition, and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventional gaming machines are known that include a movable effect device that appears on the front side of a display device by an operation and effects a game. In a device provided with such a movable effect device, it is common to perform an initial operation as a process when the power is turned on (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-73326, A

An object of the present invention is to provide a first initial operation and a second initial operation in the initial operation, and to execute the second initial operation when the first initial operation does not end normally .

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1 is
Run the game to display varying identification information based on the establishment of startup conditions, in the gaming machine to which the game result is generated favorable conditions to the player when a special result,
A movable effect device that performs a predetermined effect operation,
And a production control means for controlling the operation of the movable production device,
The effect control means,
It is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable rendering device based on power-on,
There are a plurality of movable production devices,
The initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation in which the movable effect device that operates is different from the first initial operation.
When the first initial operation is completed normally, the second initial operation is not performed,
When the first initial operation is not normally completed, the second initial operation is executed,
The first initial operation and the second initial operation are operations that can be executed in a game effect,
The first initial motion is a motion suggesting that it is in a more advantageous state for the player than the second initial motion.
The invention according to claim 2 is
In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A movable effect device that performs a predetermined effect operation,
And a production control means for controlling the operation of the movable production device,
The effect control means,
It is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable rendering device based on power-on,
The initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation different from the first initial operation,
In the initial operation, if the first initial operation ends normally, the second initial operation is not performed,
If the first initial operation is not normally completed, the second initial operation can be executed.
The effect control means,
When the first initial operation was not normally ended in the initial operation but the second initial operation was normally ended, when an operation corresponding to the first initial operation was selected in the game effect The operation corresponding to the second initial operation is performed instead of the operation corresponding to the first initial operation.

According to the present invention, the first initial operation and the second initial operation are provided in the initial operation, and the second initial operation can be executed when the first initial operation does not end normally .

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the game board. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a rear component. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a lower movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation|movement of a 1st lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view explaining operation of the 2nd lower movable member. It is a front view of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation of an upper movable accessory unit. It is a front view explaining operation of an upper movable accessory unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a central movable accessory unit. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Rear view. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of a central movable accessory unit, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Rear view. It is a front view of a special variation winning device. It is a top view of a special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining operation|movement of an opening-and-closing member, Comprising: (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the special variation winning device. It is a rear view of a front wall member. It is a figure which shows a rear wall member, Comprising: (a) Front view, (b) Rear view. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a main part. It is the figure seen from the left explaining the operation of the opening-and-closing member unit, and is the (a) closed state and the (b) open state. It is a figure showing an opening-and-closing member, and is a (a) top view and a (b) front view. It is a front view of (a) opening-and-closing member unit, and (b) AA sectional view. It is a bottom view explaining operation|movement of an opening/closing member unit, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a top view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device. It is a figure explaining the flow-down mode of the game sphere in a special variation winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the (a) top view and the (b) right side. It is a figure explaining the flow-down aspect of the game ball in a special variation winning device, and is a perspective view seen from the left. It is a front view explaining the flow-down mode of the game ball in the special variation winning device, (a) closed state, (b) open state. It is a figure explaining the behavior of the game sphere at the time of opening an opening-and-closing member. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control system of the gaming machine. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining main processing. It is a flow chart explaining checksum calculation processing. It is a flow chart explaining initial value random number updating processing. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flow chart explaining output processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. 7 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating random number update processing 2. It is a flow chart explaining winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining fraud & prize monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining the winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check processing. It is a flow chart explaining pay-out busy signal check processing. 11 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special process starting port switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining fluctuation start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure fluctuation process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining time shortening change frequency update processing. It is the flowchart which explains production mode information check processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating a fanfare/interval interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flow chart explaining small hit fanfare middle processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare/during-interval processing. It is a flow chart explaining processing transfer setting processing during special winning opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening opening process. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining the special winning opening remaining ball processing. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit ending process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process transfer setting process 2. (A) is a flow chart for explaining a small hit fanfare mid-process, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining a small hit mid-process shift setting process. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a small hit. It is a flow chart explaining a small hit operation shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart explaining a small hit end process shift setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit ending process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure normal process transfer setting process 3. It is the flowchart which explains the production command setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart for explaining the universal figure game process. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining the ordinary prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing usually. It is a flow chart explaining ordinary processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during normal figure change. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the process of changing the public figure, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining a process of setting transition to the general figure display. It is a flow chart explaining processing during public figure display. It is a flow chart explaining the processing shift setting processing during a normal figure hit. It is a flow chart explaining processing during ordinary drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a normal power operation shift setting process. (A) is a flowchart explaining the normal electric ball remaining ball process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the end process shift setting process per universal map. (A) is a flowchart explaining the end-of-the-universal-drawing process, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the normal-drawing-to-the-normal-process shift setting process 2. It is a flow chart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining magnet irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining external information edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening signal editing process. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining an example of the production in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the selection rate of a state suggestion display. It is the flowchart which explains the main processing in the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart explaining reception command check processing. It is a flow chart explaining received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart explaining single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining look-ahead variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining symbol type command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining variation production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit type command processing. It is a flow chart explaining count production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining fanfare production setting processing. It is the flowchart which explains the round production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining interval effect setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining ending production setting processing. It is the figure which explains the deformation example of the production in the special game state. It is the figure which explains the deformation example of the production in the special game state. It is a flow chart explaining initial operation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the information utilized by the setting of an initial operation. It is the figure which shows the state where each movable production device operates. It is a figure explaining the initial operation at the time of a power failure restoration. It is a figure which shows an example of an initial operation table. It is a figure which shows an example of an initial operation table. It is a figure explaining an alternative initial operation. It is a flow chart explaining operation substitution processing. It is a figure explaining change of notice production. It is a figure explaining the display mode and reliability of notice production. It is the flowchart which explains production mode management processing. It is the flowchart which explains production mode change setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining advance notice change processing. It is a flow chart explaining the notice change processing in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the prefetch information storage area in a 2nd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the notice change processing in the 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the notice production in the 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the notice production in the 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the notice change processing in the 3rd modification. It is a flow chart explaining the initial operation processing in the 4th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the initial operation processing in the 5th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the initial operation processing in another example of the 5th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the one-shot type|system|group command process in a 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining the received command analysis processing in the 6th modification. It is a flow chart explaining return operation processing in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the operation range of the movable production device in the 7th modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the notice production in the 8th modification. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the notice production in the 8th modification.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable/closable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. A glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, etc. are built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, the LED, etc., an abnormality notification color (for example, red color). The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) and the speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is provided below the front frame 12 as well. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b are used to notify the content of the abnormality by voice. In addition, you may make it provide the lamp for alerting|reporting abnormalities in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reservoir plate) for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided. Further, the upper edge of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having an effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be provided separately from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device may be provided near the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 to cause the ball-striking launch device to direct the gaming balls supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. Further, by the player operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), the effect of the player's operation intervening is displayed. It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 is formed. The game area 32 is configured by being surrounded by a resin side case 33 and an outer peripheral wall 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, there is provided a guide wall 491 which is provided along the outer peripheral wall 31 and forms a guide path 490 for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 having a display device 41 in the substantial center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and prevent the game ball from jumping in from the peripheral game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variable display game, and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board production device 44 that produces an effect by playing. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 for providing a starting condition of the universal figure changing display game is provided. The game ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31). Two general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening is provided on the lower right of the special variation winning device 38 arranged on the lower right of the center case 40. 35 are arranged. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 31).

Below the center case 40, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) and a second special drawing changing display that give start conditions for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). A winning device 90 is provided which includes a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a starting condition of a game (special figure 2 variable display game). The winning device 90 includes a distribution member 92 that alternately distributes the game balls, which have flowed into the upper inlet 91, to the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97. The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a rotation axis along the front-rear direction, and the tilting direction changes depending on the weight of the game sphere that flows in, and the first starting winning opening 36 on the left side and the second starting winning opening 36 on the right side. The game balls are alternately distributed to the starting winning opening 97. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 31), and the game ball that has won the second starting winning opening 97 is the start opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 31). Detected by. Further, below the winning device 90, there is provided an outlet 30a for collecting game balls that have not been won in a winning opening or the like.

Further, on the right side of the center case 40, an ordinary variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a starting condition of the second special figure changing display game is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which is opened by turning in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the right and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. The movable member 37b is normally provided. It is almost vertical and holds a closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot flow. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the universal electrical solenoid 37c (see FIG. 31) as a drive device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally varies. The game balls can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game balls can easily flow into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 31). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a front side is covered with a transparent cover and a downward flow path 615 is formed which communicates with the upper and lower sides, and the game balls which have not won the normal variation winning device 37 pass downward through the downward flow path 615. Run down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The guide portion 616 has an upper surface 617 that is an inclined surface that descends to the left, receives a game ball that flows downward, and guides it to the left where the special variation winning device 38 exists. Further, the guide unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information regarding the special figure variation display game.

This information display device 630 has a first information display section for displaying the number of first starting memories which are execution rights of the first special figure variation display game, and a second starting memory which is execution rights of the second special figure variation display game. A second information display section for displaying the number of Further, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the first special figure variable display game is displayed by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the display device 41 by the first to third symbols. Separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed by the third information display section and the display device 41 by the first to third symbols, the decoration special figure 2 variation corresponding to the second special figure variation display game by the fourth symbol A fourth information display unit for displaying the display game is provided.

The first information display section and the second information display section are each composed of two light emitting members, and the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each composed of one light emitting member. In the second display device, three of these six light emitting members are arranged side by side in two rows on each side. The upper two light emitting members in the right row configure a first information display section, and the upper two light emitting members in the left row configure a second information display section. The lower one light emitting member in the right row constitutes the third information display section, and the lower one light emitting member in the left row constitutes the fourth information display section.

Each of the first information display section and the second information display section is composed of two light emitting members, but a design is provided around each information display section so that it can be seen that the two light emitting members are related. At a glance, it can be seen that one information display unit is composed of two light emitting members. Further, the third information display section and the fourth information display section are each formed of one light emitting member, but the designs around these information display sections are designed to be independent. At a glance, it can be seen that one light emitting member constitutes the information display section. The design around the light emitting member has a sense of unity with the design of the entire gaming machine, and does not impair the aesthetics. Further, the design around the light emitting member is not formed by attaching a seal or the like, but is formed on the member forming the guiding portion 616, and thus the labor and cost at the time of manufacturing can be reduced.

Further, in the lower right part of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variation winning device (big winning opening) 38 which can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. It is set up. The details of the structure of the special variation winning device 38 will be described later, but depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening/closing member 990 closes the special winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player). The opening/closing member 990 retracts and converts the game ball flowing down the game area 32 into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which it can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a special winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening/closing member 990 driven by a special winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 31) as a drive device, and is in a special gaming state (first special gaming state). During the small hitting game state (the second special game state), the large winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening, and the player is given a predetermined amount. A game value (prize ball) is given. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 31) is provided inside the special winning opening (a winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. ..

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting) to the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the general winning opening 35 of the winning device 90. It is possible to aim for a prize, and by hitting a game ball to the right-hand side game area (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the universal figure starting gate 34, the ordinary variable prize device 37, and the special variable prize device 38 It has become.

On the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game, and the universal figure starting gate 34, which form the special figure variable display game, are won. A collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game as a trigger and various information is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a special segment 1 display unit (first special diagram variation display unit) 51 and a special diagram 2 variation display for a game including a special segment 1 variation display game including a 7-segment type display unit (LED lamp) and the like. The game is provided with a special figure 2 display device (second special figure variation display portion) 52 and various display devices composed of LED lamps. The various displays include a special figure 1 hold indicator for informing the starting memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a special figure 2 hold indicator for informing of the starting memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game. .. In addition, a round display section that displays the number of rounds (the number of times the special variation winning device is opened and closed) at the time of a big hit, a first game state display section that informs whether it is in a time saving state (during normal power support, in a specific game state), left A second game state display unit is provided which informs the player of how to strike (normal strike) and right strike, which is advantageous to the player (how to strike in accordance with the game state). Further, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, a third gaming state display section (third gaming state display unit, probability state display section) for displaying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state, a universal figure variation display game Includes a general-purpose figure display for use and a general-use hold display for notifying the number of starting memories of the universal figure display game.

In the special figure 1 display device 51, during the change time of the first special figure changing display game, the special figure 1 changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the first special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the first special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result mode form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure changing display game.

In the special figure 2 display device 52, during the change time of the second special figure changing display game, the special figure 2 changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the second special figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the second special figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 2 changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result form form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure changing display game.

In the public figure display device, during the change time of the general figure changing display game, the general figure changing display for displaying a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns in a predetermined order is repeatedly performed. Then, when the variation time of the general figure variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result of the general figure variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the universal figure changing display and the lighting pattern displayed as a result mode form identification information (public figure, normal symbol) for displaying the universal figure changing display game.

The special figure 1 hold indicator displays the number of first starting memories (first hold number) which is the right to execute the first special figure variable display game by turning off, blinking, and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The special figure 2 hold indicator displays the number of the second starting memory (second hold number) which is the right to execute the second special figure variable display game by turning off, blinking and turning on the plurality of light emitting units. The public figure hold indicator displays the number of public figure starting memories (number of public figure holdings), which is the right to execute the general figure variable display game, by turning off, blinking, or turning on a plurality of light emitting units.

The round display unit turns off all the light-emitting units when the special game state is not in progress, and makes the lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. The first gaming state display unit (time saving state notification unit) turns off the lamp in the normal gaming state where the time saving state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), and the time saving state occurs. If so (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), turn on the lamp. The second gaming state display unit (right-handling notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp in a gaming state in which left-handing is more advantageous to the player than right-handing (normal hitting), rather than left-handing. When the player is in a game state in which the right hit is more advantageous to the player (when the right hit is performed), the lamp is turned on. The third gaming state display unit turns on the LED when the power is turned on and is in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when not in the high probability state.

Next, details of the game board 30 in the game machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 includes a game board main body 80 having a substantially rectangular plate shape, a front component member 600 that constitutes a front side portion of the center case 40, and a rear side portion of the center case 40 and the game board. A rear component 700 to which various necessary members are attached.

The front component 600 is attached by being fitted from the front side into an opening 81 formed in the game board body 80 and penetrating in the front and rear. The front component has an annular base member 610, and various members are attached to the base member 610. The base member 610 is inserted into an opening 81 formed through the front and rear of the game board main body 80, and a peripheral wall 611 forming a front portion of an inner peripheral wall in a recessed chamber-like space recessed rearward from the game area 32. A plate-shaped flange-shaped mounting portion 612 is formed at the front end of the peripheral wall 611 perpendicularly to the peripheral wall 611.

Of the mounting portion 612, a portion formed outside the space surrounded by the peripheral wall 611 is a portion of the opening 81 when the front component 600 is inserted into the opening 81 formed in the game board body 80 from the front side. The game board main body 80 has a rear surface that abuts on the front surface of the game board main body 80. As a result, the front-rear position of the front component 600 with respect to the game board body 80 is set to a predetermined front-rear position. Further, a plurality of screw holes are formed in this mounting portion 612, and the front component member 600 can be fixed to the game board body 80 by screws. Further, a part of the mounting portion 612 is arranged on the front surface side of the game board body 80 at a position visible to the player, and the front surface thereof is decorated. In addition to the above, the base member 610 is provided with a screw hole, a screwing portion, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving a rib, and the like so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Has become.

A regulation wall 613 is provided on the front surface of the base member 610 except for a stage portion 620, a warp flow path forming member 614, and a portion where the normal variation winning device 37 is arranged, which will be described later. The restriction wall 613 is forward by the front-rear width of the game area 32 (width from the front surface of the game board body 80 to the back surface of the cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front of the game board 30) of the mounting portion 612. It is supposed to be extended. Therefore, by mounting the front component 600 at a predetermined position of the game board body 80, the restriction wall 613 located on the front side of the mounting portion 612 extends into the game area 32, and the game ball flowing down the game area 32 is the center. The flow into the case 40 is restricted. This ensures the visibility of the display device 41 and limits the number of game balls flowing into the stage section 620.

In addition, a warp flow that forms a warp flow path that receives a game ball flowing down the game area 32 outside the center case 40 and guides it to the stage portion 620 on the left side portion when viewed from the front side of the base member 610. A channel forming member 614 is attached. The warp flow path forming member 614 is attached to the front surface of the attachment portion 612, and the front and rear width of the game area 32 is larger than the attachment portion 612 (the cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front of the game board 30 from the front surface of the game board body 80). The width up to the back surface of) is extended to the front. Further, the upper end of the warp flow path forming member 614 is continuous with the lower end of the restriction wall 613 attached so as to extend forward of the attachment portion 612 on the left side portion when viewed from the front surface side of the base member 610. It has become.

The warp flow path formed by the warp flow path forming member 614 is a tubular flow path having an inner diameter that allows the game balls to flow in a row, and opens toward the game area 32 on the left side of the center case 40. A game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be accepted. This upstream side end portion forms the inflow port of the warp flow path. Furthermore, the warp flow path is an L-shaped flow path that guides the game ball that has flowed in from the upstream end to the lower right and then to the rear. Then, the downstream side end portion is opened rearward, and the game ball is guided to the left end portion of the stage portion 620.

The game ball of the stage part 620 can roll forward, backward, leftward and rightward, and both left and right sides have an inclined surface that descends toward the center, and the central part immediately above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90 protrudes upward. It is formed in a substantially W shape. The central portion of the stage portion 620 projects upward, but is lower than the left and right ends. The game ball that has passed through the warp flow path flows into the stage portion 620 from the left end and rolls along the left-right direction. Further, the game ball that has bounced under the stage portion 620 can also flow in.

In the substantially W-shaped stage portion 620, an inclined surface 621 that descends forward is formed at the lowest portion located on both sides of the upwardly projecting central portion. By this inclined surface 621, the game ball whose downflow force is weakened on the stage portion 620 is guided from the front end of the stage portion 620 to the lower game area 32.

Further, in the stage portion 620 formed in a substantially W shape, a groove-like flow-down passage 622 extending in the front-rear direction and descending rearward is provided at a portion which is an apex of a central portion protruding upward. Has been formed. This downflow path 622 is a shallow groove, and many game balls roll left and right without fitting in the groove. The game ball fitted in the flow-down path 622 is guided rearward, flows into an inflow port (not shown), and flows into a guide flow path 623 formed below the stage portion 620. The guide flow path 623 is a flow path that descends to the front, the downstream end is located directly above the inflow port 91 of the winning device 90, and is likely to flow into the winning device 90.

Further, on the right side as viewed from the front side of the front component member 600, a universal figure starting gate 34 through which game balls can pass is provided. The general-purpose starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a for detecting a passing game ball. Further, below the universal figure starting gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37 having a movable member 37b is provided. The game balls that have won the normal variation winning device 37 are guided to the rear of the front component member 600 and flow into a discharge passage (not shown). Further, the normal variation winning device 37 includes a starting opening 2 switch for detecting a winning game ball and a universal electric solenoid 37c for driving a movable member 37b.

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a front side is covered with a transparent cover and a downward flow path 615 is formed which communicates with the upper and lower sides, and the game balls which have not won the normal variation winning device 37 pass downward through the downward flow path 615. Run down to. A guide portion 616 is provided below the flow path 615. The upper surface 617 of the guide portion is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the upper surface 617 receives the game ball that flows down the downflow path 615, and guides it to the left. Further, the guide unit 616 is provided with an information display device 630 that displays information regarding the special figure variation display game.

As shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4, the rear component member 700 has a rear base member 710 having a substantially rectangular box shape having a recess 711 that is open forward, and the rear base member 710 has screw holes and screws. A stopper, a boss for positioning, a recess for receiving the boss, a slit for receiving a rib, etc. are formed so that various members can be fixed at appropriate positions. Further, at the front end of the rear base member 710, a brim-shaped fixing portion 713 is formed which extends outwardly perpendicularly to the side wall 712, and the rear constituent member 700 is provided on the rear surface of the game board body 80 in a predetermined manner. It can be fixed in position. Further, the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 is formed with a through hole 715 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The through hole 715 allows the display surface of the display device 41 mounted behind the rear base member 710 to be visually recognized.

The display device 41 attached to the back surface of the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710 includes a liquid crystal display device having a display surface capable of covering the entire through hole 715 formed in the rear wall 714 of the rear base member 710. There is. The display device 41 is attached so that the display surface is on the front side, so that the image on the display surface can be viewed from the front of the game board 30 through the through hole 715 formed in the rear base member 710. Has been done. The display device 41 is not limited to one including a liquid crystal display device, and may be one including a display such as an EL or CRT, for example.

The lower movable accessory unit 730, the upper movable accessory unit 800, and the central movable accessory that form the board effect device 44, which is a movable effect device that produces an effect by operating inside the recess 711 of the rear base member 710. A unit 880 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is disposed below the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the lower movable accessory unit 730 includes two first lower movable members 740 and 741 imitating a mausoleum and a second lower movable member 770 imitating a gourd. The first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 can be operated so as to appear on the front side of the display device 41. Further, the lower movable accessory unit 730 is provided with a first lower movable member 740, 741 and a first lower portion arranged on the front side as a base portion to which a drive mechanism for operating the second lower movable member 770 and various members are attached. The base portion 731, the second lower base portion 732 arranged in the center, and the third lower base portion 733 arranged on the back surface side are provided.

The motor 734, which serves as a drive source for driving the first lower movable member 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770, has a drive shaft in the front-rear direction at the lower right when viewed from the front side of the third lower base portion 733. It is attached along. The lower movable accessory unit 730 is provided with first lower movable members 740 and 741 and a second lower movable member 770, which are driven by one motor 734. The driving force from the motor 734 is applied to a first gear 735 rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and a second gear 737 meshing with the first gear 735 rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is transmitted at the same time. The first gear 735 is for operating the first lower movable members 740, 741, and a first drive shaft 736 for transmitting power to the first lower movable members 740, 741 extends forward on the front side. It is provided to do.

Further, a first light shielding plate 739 is provided on the outer periphery of the first gear 735 so as to extend in the radial direction. The first light shielding plate 739 can be detected by a first detection sensor 781 (illustrated in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the first gear 735. The first detection sensor 781 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined gap, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection portion are arranged such that the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion is at a position on the circumference where the first light-shielding plate 739 provided on the first gear 735 moves.

Also, the second gear 737 is for operating the second lower movable member 770, and the second drive shaft 738 for transmitting power to the second lower movable member 770 extends rearward on the back surface side. It is provided in. As will be described later, when the motor 734 is driven in a predetermined direction (here, clockwise when viewed from the front side), the driving force is transmitted via the first driving shaft 736 so that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 operate. However, the second lower movable member 770 transmits the driving force via the second drive shaft 738 when the motor 734 is driven in the direction opposite to the above-described predetermined direction (here, counterclockwise when viewed from the front side). Is configured to work.

As shown in FIG. 6, one of the first lower movable members 740 is provided with a bearing portion 742 at a lower end portion thereof, and the bearing portion 742 is provided on an upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 and is provided with a rotation shaft 751 along the front-rear direction. It is rotatably supported by. The bearing portion 742 is a gear, and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 740 can operate around the rotation shaft 751. Similarly, the other first lower movable member 741 is also provided with a bearing portion 743 at the lower end portion, and this bearing portion 743 is rotated by a rotation shaft 752 provided in the upper portion of the second lower base portion 732 along the front-rear direction. It is pivotally supported. The bearing portion 743 is a gear, and receives the driving force from the motor 734 so that the first lower movable member 741 can operate around the rotation shaft 752.

The gears of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740 pivotally supported by the rotary shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front are doubled in the front and rear, and the drive force from the motor 734 is provided by the front gear. I am supposed to receive it. The rear gear is configured to transmit the driving force to the gear of the bearing portion 743 provided on the other first lower movable member 741. One motor 734 drives the two first lower movable members 740, 741 can operate simultaneously.

The gear on the front side of the bearing portion 742 provided on the first lower movable member 740, which is pivotally supported by the rotation shaft 751 on the left side when viewed from the front, is arranged below the bearing portion 742 and is centered on the axis along the front-back direction. It meshes with a rotatable gear 753. The gear 753 is adapted to mesh with a rack gear 761 provided on an upper portion of a slide member 760 provided on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 so as to be slidable with respect to the second lower base portion 732. The first lower movable member 740, 741 is operated by moving the slide member 760 left and right.

The slide member 760 is a flat plate-shaped member and is arranged such that the plate surface thereof extends along the front surface of the second lower base portion 732. The slide member 760 is provided with an oval supported portion 762 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the left-right direction. The supported support portion 762 has a support shaft formed on the front surface of the second lower base portion 732 and protruding forward. When 754 is inserted, it is slidably supported in the left-right direction. Further, the first lower base portion 731 attached to the front of the second lower base portion 732 covers the slide member 760, so that the slide member 760 is held so as not to drop forward.

Further, the slide member 760 is formed with a linear through hole 763 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The through hole 763 has an arcuate portion and a straight portion extending downward from the right end of the arcuate portion as viewed from the front side. The first drive shaft 736 provided on the first gear 735 is inserted from the rear into the through hole 763, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the slide member 760.

FIG. 6A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the first drive shaft 736 is located at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 is equal to the length from the center of the first gear 735 to the center of the first drive shaft 736. Further, in the initial state, the center of the first gear 735 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 763 are in a state of being aligned front and back. Further, when the first lower movable member 740, 741 is in the initial position as described above, the first light shielding plate 739 is retracted from the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion, and the detection result of the first detection sensor 781 is ON. (See FIGS. 5 and 7(a)).

When the first gear 735 is rotated clockwise from the front side from this initial state, the first drive shaft 736 moves the linear portion of the through hole 763 while pushing the slide member 760 to the left. As a result, as shown in FIG. 6B, the slide member 760 slides to the left, and the rack gear 761 rotates the gear 753 to rotate the first lower movable members 740 and 741 upward. The display device 41 appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning to the initial state, the operation is the opposite of the above. As will be described later, the second lower movable member 770 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the first drive shaft 736 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 763, the slide member 760 is not pressed and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 do not operate. The same applies when returning the second lower movable member 770 from the operating state to the initial state.

Further, by rotating the first gear 735 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front side from the initial state to move the first lower movable members 740 and 741 from the initial position, the first light blocking plate 739 causes the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit. , And the detection result by the first detection sensor 781 is OFF. The first light-shielding plate 739 is provided in such a range that the state where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial position is kept in the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781. Based on the sensor 781 being in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial position. That is, the first detection sensor 781 serves as position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first lower movable member 740, 741 which is the movable production device forming the board production device 44, and the first lower movable member 740, 741 has the initial position. The production accessory switch 47 for detecting the presence of

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the second lower movable member 770 is provided with a rotation shaft 771 along the front-rear direction at the lower end thereof, and the rotation shafts are the second lower base portion 732 and the third lower base portion 733. It is rotatably supported by. Further, a linear through hole 772 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed near the rotating shaft 771. The through hole 772 includes an arcuate portion and a linear portion extending from the left end of the arcuate portion when viewed from the front side in the state shown in FIG. The second drive shaft 738 provided on the second gear 737 is inserted from the front into the through hole 772, and the driving force from the motor 734 is transmitted to the second lower movable member 770.

A second light shielding plate 773 extending in the radial direction of the rotary shaft is provided near the rotary shaft 771 and at a position facing the through hole 772 with the rotary shaft 771 interposed therebetween. The second light shielding plate 773 can be detected by a second detection sensor 782 (illustrated in FIG. 7) provided adjacent to the second lower movable member 770. The second detection sensor 782 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The output is provided so that the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion in the detection portion is located at the position on the circumference where the second light shielding plate 773 provided on the second lower movable member 770 moves.

FIG. 7A shows an initial state in which the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 are all in the initial positions. In this state, the second drive shaft 738 is located at the connecting portion of the arcuate portion and the straight portion of the through hole 772. The radius of the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 is equal to the length from the center of the second gear 737 to the center of the second drive shaft 738. Then, in the initial state, the center of the second gear 737 and the center of the circle forming the arc in the arc-shaped portion of the through hole 772 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

In this state, the first light shielding plate 739 is retracted from the detecting portion of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is in the ON state. Further, the second light shielding plate 773 is retracted from the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 is turned on. As described above, based on the fact that both the first detection sensor 781 and the second detection sensor 782 are in the ON state, the effect control device 300 sets the first lower movable members 740, 741 and the second lower movable member 770 to the initial positions. It is possible to understand that it is in the initial state.

From this initial state, when the motor 734 is driven so as to rotate the second gear 737 clockwise when viewed from the front side, the second drive shaft 738 pushes the second lower movable member 770 upward, and Move the straight part. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second lower movable member 770 rotates upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41. When returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial state, the operation opposite to the above is performed.

Further, when the second lower movable member 770 operates from the initial position, the second light shielding plate 773 enters the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782 and the second detection sensor 782 is turned off. The second light shielding plate 773 is provided in a range where the state where the second lower movable member 770 does not enter the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782 is maintained when the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position, and the second detection sensor 782 is provided. Is OFF, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position. That is, the operating state of the second lower movable member 770 can be detected based on the detection result of the second detection sensor 782, and the second detection sensor 782 can detect the position of the second lower movable member 770 forming the movable effect device. In addition to forming a position detecting means, it also forms an effect accessory switch 47 for detecting that the second lower movable member 770 is in the initial position.

When operating the second lower movable member 770 from the initial position, the first gear 735 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the state shown in FIG. 7(a), and then the state shown in FIG. 7(b). Becomes The first light-shielding plate 739 is provided in such a range that the state where it does not enter the detecting portion of the first detection sensor 781 is maintained in this process, and the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state. Of course, in the process of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position, the opposite operation is performed, so the first detection sensor 781 remains in the ON state.

Further, as described above, the first lower movable members 740 and 741 can be operated by driving the motor 734 so that the second gear 737 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front side from the initial state. At this time, since the second drive shaft 738 moves along the arcuate portion of the through hole 772, the second lower movable member 770 is not pressed and the second lower movable member 770 does not operate. The same applies when returning the first lower movable members 740, 741 from the operating state to the initial state.

As described above, when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are operated from the initial position, the first gear 735 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front side from the state shown in FIG. 7A. As a result, the first light shielding plate 739 enters the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781, and the first detection sensor 781 is turned off. The first light-shielding plate 739 is provided in such a range that the state where the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial position is kept in the detection portion of the first detection sensor 781. Based on the sensor 781 being in the OFF state, the effect control device 300 can recognize that the first lower movable members 740 and 741 are not in the initial position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, when the second lower movable member 770 is rotated upward and appears on the front side of the display device 41, an effect display that emphasizes the second lower movable member 770 is performed on the display device 41. It is possible. Of course, the effect display may be similarly performed even when the first lower movable members 740 and 741 appear on the front side of the display device 41. Further, the display mode of the effect display is not limited to this, and may be any display that emphasizes the movable member that appears on the front side of the display device 41.

In addition, a plurality of LEDs are provided in a portion of the second lower movable member 770 that imitates a gourd, so that decoration by light emission can be performed. In addition, the letters "Dearca" also emit light. These four characters are designed to emit light independently of each other, but for "le", the "no" part and the "re" part emit light independently. As a result, as shown in FIG. 7B and FIG. 8, it is possible to emit light only in the “de” portion and the “re” portion in the “le” and display “dele”. There is. By thus dividing the characters and displaying different information, a novel effect can be performed. In addition, the display of "delay" is for notifying that it is the delay mode, which is one of a plurality of effect modes. Since the effect mode is informed by the display on the movable member in this way, the set effect mode can be transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

As shown in FIG. 3, the upper movable accessory unit 800 is arranged above and on both sides of the through hole 715. As shown in FIG. 9, the upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a circular first upper movable member 848 and a second upper movable member 860 that imitates a tiger's hand. 2 The production is performed by operating the upper movable member 860.

The upper movable accessory unit 800 includes a base member 801 attached to the rear base member 710, and a movable member unit 820 that is vertically movable with respect to the base member 801 and includes a first upper movable member 848. .. The base member 801 is U-shaped when viewed from the front surface side, and includes an upper base portion 802 arranged above the through hole 715 and a left base portion arranged leftward when viewed from the front surface side of the through hole 715. 803, and a right base portion 804 arranged to the right when viewed from the front side of the through hole 715.

At the right end of the left base portion 803 and the left end of the right base portion 804, a guide portion 805 extending in the up-down direction is provided. The guide portion 805 guides the movable member unit 820 in the vertical direction. Further, the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 are respectively provided with drive mechanisms 806 that drive the movable member unit 820 up and down. Of the drive mechanisms 806 that drive the movable member unit 820 up and down, the drive mechanism 806 that performs the left operation when viewed from the front side is referred to as the movable member unit (left), and the drive mechanism 806 that performs the right operation is moved. It may be referred to as a member unit (right).

Each drive mechanism 806 has a motor 807 as a drive source, and the arm is rotated by driving the motor 807. A drive shaft 809 is provided at the tip of the arm. The drive shaft 809 is connected to the link member 830 of the movable member unit 820. By driving the motor 807, the link member 830 can be operated to drive the movable member unit 820 up and down.

The movable member unit 820 includes a link member 830 connected to the drive mechanism 806, a unit base portion 841 for mounting various members, a first upper movable member 848 disposed on the front side of the unit base portion 841, and a unit base. A rear surface of the unit base portion 841; a first drive portion (not shown) that drives the first upper movable member and a second drive portion (not shown) that drives the second upper movable member, which are arranged on the back surface side of the portion 841. And a guided member 842 that is guided by a guide portion 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804.

The link members 830 are rotatably attached to the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804, respectively, and are arranged so as to extend in directions opposite to each other. The link member 830 has a rotating shaft 810 provided on the left base portion 803 and extending forward along the front-rear direction, or a rotating shaft provided on the right base portion 804 extending forward along the front-rear direction. A bearing portion 831 through which 810 is inserted is provided at one end portion, and is rotatably supported by the left base portion 803 or the right base portion 804. Further, the link member 830 is formed with a first guide portion 832 which is an elongated hole through which the drive shaft 809 provided in the arm of the drive mechanism 806 is inserted, and the motor 807 is driven to rotate the arm. Then, the drive shaft 809 is configured to rotate the link member 830 up and down while moving along the first guide portion 832.

A third light shielding plate 835 that extends in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided near the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 that is axially supported by the left base portion 803. The third light shielding plate 835 can be detected by a third detection sensor 811 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the left base portion 803. The third detection sensor 811 is an optical sensor that includes a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection portion are arranged so that the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion is at a position on the circumference where the third light shielding plate 835 moves.

A fourth light shielding plate 836 extending in the radial direction of the rotating shaft 810 is provided near the bearing portion 831 of the link member 830 that is axially supported by the right base portion 804. The fourth light shielding plate 836 can be detected by a fourth detection sensor 812 provided adjacent to the rotation shaft 810 of the right base portion 804. The fourth detection sensor 812 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. The light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion in the detection portion are arranged so that the gap between the light-emitting portion and the light-receiving portion is at a position on the circumference where the fourth light shielding plate 836 moves.

Further, a connection shaft for connecting to the unit base portion 841 of the movable member unit 820 is provided at the other end portion of the link member 830 opposite to the one end portion provided with the bearing portion 831 so as to extend rearward. There is. Further, the link member 830 has a second guide portion 834, which is a long hole through which a support shaft provided at one end portion of the back surface of the second upper movable member 860 attached so as to cover the front side of the link member 830 can be inserted. Is formed, and the one end portion of the second upper movable member 860 is guided and supported by the second guide portion 834.

The unit base portion 841 includes a circular main body portion and a supported portion 845 extending leftward and rightward from the main body portion. The supported portion 845 is formed with a third guide portion which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending leftward and rightward, and the connecting shaft of the link member 830 is slidably connected to the third guide portion 846. The unit base portion 841 moves up and down according to the operation of the link member 830 based on the drive of the motor 807. Further, a guided member 842 is attached to the back surface of the unit base portion 841. The guided member 842 is a plate-like member that is arranged so as to extend in the left-right direction, and the guided portion that is guided by the guide portions 805 provided on the left base portion 803 and the right base portion 804 at the left and right ends. 843 is provided.

A circular first upper movable member 848 is provided on the front side of the main body. In the first upper movable member 848, a rotation shaft provided in the center of the back surface along the front-rear direction is rotatably supported by the main body portion, and the first drive portion rotates and rotates the rotation shaft. It is designed to rotate around the axis of rotation. The first drive unit is provided with a fifth detection sensor that detects that the rotatable first upper movable member 848 is at the initial position.

In addition, the second drive unit provided in the main body can drive the second upper movable member 860 independently of the first upper movable member 848. The second drive unit includes a drive arm 853 that drives the second upper movable member 860, and the drive arm 853 can be swung left and right. A second upper movable member 860 is connected to the other end of the drive arm 853, and the second upper movable member 860 is swung left and right by swinging the drive arm 853 left and right. In addition, the second drive unit is provided with an eighth detection sensor that detects that the swingable second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position.

9 to 11 show the operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800. Note that some members are omitted for the sake of explanation. FIG. 9 shows an initial state in which the movable member unit 820 is in the initial position at the upper end of the operating range, and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also in the initial position. Further, in FIG. 10, the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operation range, but the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are in the initial position and in an operating state. Further, FIG. 11 shows an operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range and the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are also operating from the initial position.

In the initial state shown in FIG. 9, the movable member unit 820 is at the upper end position in the operating range. In this state, the third light shield plate 835 is located at the detection portion of the third detection sensor 811, and the fourth light shield plate 836 is located at the detection portion of the fourth detection sensor 812, so that the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 811 are detected. All the sensors 812 are turned off. Further, the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are also turned off. When the drive mechanism 806 is operated from this initial state to rotate the drive shaft 809 provided at the tip of the arm toward the display device 41 side, the link member 830 rotates downward, and the movable member unit 820 moves. Move down. In the operating state in which the movable member unit 820 is at the lower end of the operating range, the drive shaft 809 is located at the lower end in the turning range, and the link member 830 is also located at the lower end in the turning range, as shown in FIG. ing.

Further, in this state, the third light shielding plate 835 retracts from the detection unit of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth light shielding plate 836 retracts from the detection unit of the fourth detection sensor 812, and the third detection sensor 811 and the third detection sensor 811 All the 4 detection sensors 812 are turned on. Since the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are at the initial positions, both the fifth detection sensor and the eighth detection sensor are turned off.

That is, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the movable member unit 820 is at the initial position based on that the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are both OFF. Therefore, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 form an effect accessory switch 47 that detects the initial position of the movable member unit 820 that forms the board effect device 44. Further, the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 form a position detection unit that can detect the position of the movable member unit 820 that forms the movable effect device.

Note that, here, when the movable member unit 820 slightly moves from the initial position, the state in which both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are off continues, but the third light-shielding plate 835 and the fourth light-shielding plate 835. By adjusting the range in which the plate 836 is provided, both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 can be turned on when the movable member unit 820 is slightly moved from the initial position. ..

When the first drive unit is operated, the first upper movable member 848 rotates in one direction, and the fifth detection sensor is turned on until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. The first upper movable member 848 can be driven both clockwise and counterclockwise. When the second drive unit is operated, the second upper movable member 860 is moved toward the first upper movable member 848 side as shown in FIG. 10, and when the second upper movable member 860 is moved from the first upper movable member 848 as shown in FIG. Repeatedly move left and right from the separated state. The eighth detection sensor is turned on until it returns to the initial position shown in FIG. That is, the fifth detection sensor serves as position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the first upper movable member 848 forming the movable effect device, and also the effect accessory switch for detecting that the first upper movable member 848 is at the initial position. Make 47. Further, the eighth detection sensor serves as position detecting means capable of detecting the position of the second upper movable member 860 forming the movable effect device, and also the effect accessory switch for detecting that the second upper movable member 860 is at the initial position. Make 47.

That is, the first upper movable member 848 constitutes a first effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive mechanism 806 and the link member 830 operate the first effect movable body in the first drive mechanism section. And these constitute the first effect device. Further, the second upper movable member 860 constitutes a second effect movable body capable of performing a predetermined effect operation, and the drive section 850 constitutes a second drive mechanism section for operating the second effect movable body. Constitutes a second effect device.

Further, the second upper movable member 860 is arranged so as to cover and hide the link member 830 at both the initial position shown in FIG. 9 and the position after the operation shown in FIG. 11, and operates in the state where the link member 830 is covered. It is like this. By covering the link member 830 with the moving second upper movable member 860, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second upper movable member 860, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the link member 830, and to simply move. A higher concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case of covering with a decorative member that does not. Further, particularly in the initial position, as shown in FIG. 2, the link member 830 is covered so as to be invisible to the player. As a result, in the state where the player is in the initial position, which occupies most of the game, unnecessary parts cannot be seen by the player, and decorativeness is improved.

From the above, the game-related effects are controlled in the gaming machine 10 which executes the game based on the establishment of the predetermined condition and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game result is the special result. The effect control means (effect control device 300) and the first effect device (first upper movable member 848, drive mechanism 806, link member 830) and the second effect controlled by the effect control means to perform the effect related to the game by operating. A production device (second upper movable member 860, drive unit 850), and the first production device is a first production movable body (first upper movable member 848) capable of performing a predetermined production operation, A second effect moving body that includes a first drive mechanism unit (drive mechanism 806, link member 830) for operating the first effect movable body, and is capable of performing a predetermined effect operation by the second effect device. (Second upper movable member 860) and a second drive mechanism section (drive section 850) for operating the second effect movable body, and the second effect movable body covers the first drive mechanism section. It will be distributed.

Therefore, since the second effect movable body is arranged so as to cover the first drive mechanism section, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts, and the effect produced by the operating effect device can be enhanced, and the entertainment of the game is enhanced. Can be improved. In particular, by covering the first drive mechanism section with the second effect movable body that operates, the player's consciousness can be attracted to the second effect movable body, and it is possible to effectively prevent the line of sight from going to the first drive mechanism section. A higher concealment effect can be obtained as compared with the case where the decorative member is simply not operated.

In addition, the second effect movable body (second upper movable member 860) has a first drive mechanism unit (link member 830) that plays at least when the first effect movable body (first upper movable member 848) is in the initial position. I cover it so that I cannot see it from the person. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to see unnecessary parts in the initial position that occupies most of the game, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by the operating effect device and improve the enjoyment of the game.

As shown in FIG. 3, the central movable accessory unit 880 is arranged so as to surround the periphery of the through hole 715. As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the central movable accessory unit 880 operates so that a plurality of four central movable effect members 900, 910, 920, 930 are combined in front of the display device 41. By doing so, production is performed.

The central movable accessory unit 880 includes a movable effect base member 881 attached to the rear base member 710. In addition, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 which are arranged on the upper side of the front surface of the movable effect base member 881 and operate, and the third which is arranged on the lower side of the front surface of the movable effect base member 881 and operates. A central movable effect member 920 and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

The movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are attached to the center of the portion located on the upper side of the display device 41 in the left-right direction. In this portion, a first rotating shaft 882 that extends forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the first central movable effect member and the operation of the first central movable effect member are guided. A first guide portion 883, which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, is provided. Further, a second rotating shaft 884 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the second central movable effect member, and a front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the second central movable effect member. A second guide portion 885, which is a long hole penetrating through, is provided.

A drive source for operating the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 is provided on the right side of the part of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41 from the front side. An eggplant motor 886 is provided. A plurality of gears and the like for transmitting the driving force of the motor 886 to the first central movable effect member 900 are provided on the rear surface side of the movable effect base member 881 from the first rotating shaft 882 to the motor 886. A drive mechanism is arranged, and a back cover 896 is attached so as to cover the back surface of the drive mechanism.

Furthermore, a sixth detection sensor 889 is provided on the left side of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located above the display device 41 when viewed from the front side. The sixth detection sensor 889 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined gap, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. Is output. A sixth light-shielding plate 916 that extends rearward is provided on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910 attached to the front side of this portion, and the sixth light-shielding plate 916 is provided in the detection unit of the sixth detection sensor 889. The gap is arranged at a position on the circumference where the sixth light shielding plate 916 moves.

Further, the movable effect base member 881 is configured such that the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are attached to the center of the portion located below the display device 41 in the left-right direction. In this portion, a third rotating shaft 891 that extends forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the third central movable effect member and the operation of the third central movable effect member are guided. A third guide portion 892, which is a long hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, is provided. Further, a fourth rotating shaft 893 extending forward along the front-rear direction for pivotally supporting the fourth central movable effect member, and a front-rear direction for guiding the operation of the fourth central movable effect member. A fourth guide portion 894, which is an elongated hole that penetrates through, is provided. A motor as a drive source for operating the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is located on the left side of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41 when viewed from the front side. 895 is provided.

Further, a seventh detection sensor 897 is provided at the center of the portion of the movable effect base member 881 located below the display device 41. The seventh detection sensor 897 is an optical sensor including a detection unit in which a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit are arranged so as to face each other with a predetermined interval, and an ON signal is generated by detecting light from the light emitting unit in the light receiving unit. Is output. A seventh light-shielding plate 926 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920 attached to the front side of this portion, and the seventh light-shielding plate 926 is provided in the detection unit of the seventh detection sensor 897. The gap is arranged so as to be at a position on the circumference where the seventh light shielding plate 926 moves.

The first central movable effect member 900 arranged in the upper right portion includes a decoration portion 901 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the first central movable effect member 900, a first bearing portion 902 that penetrates before and after the first rotating shaft 882 is inserted is provided. It is rotatably supported around a moving shaft 882.

Further, in the vicinity of the first bearing portion 902, a fan-shaped first fan gear 903 and a second fan gear 904 which are fan-shaped around the rotation center of the first central movable effect member 900 are provided. The first sector gear 903 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The first fan-shaped gear 903 comes to face the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881 through a front-back penetrating portion 887 formed on the right side of the first rotation shaft 882 of the movable effect base member 881. There is. The rear surface side of the movable effect base member 881 meshes with a gear that transmits the driving force from the motor 886.

The second sector gear 904 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The second fan gear 904 meshes with the third fan gear 913 provided on the second center movable effect member 910 arranged adjacent to the left side of the first center movable effect member 900. As a result, the driving force from the motor 886 received by the first sector gear 903 is also transmitted to the second central movable effect member 910 via the second sector gear 904. A guided shaft 905 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the first central movable effect member 900. The guided shaft 905 is adapted to be inserted into the first guide portion 883, and is guided along the extending direction of the first guide portion 883 when the first central movable effect member 900 rotates. This allows the first central movable effect member 900 to smoothly operate.

The second central movable effect member 910 arranged in the upper left portion includes a decoration portion 911 that is decorated and appears on the front side of the display device 41. Further, at one end of the second central movable effect member 910, a second bearing portion 912 that penetrates before and after the second rotation shaft 884 is inserted is provided. It is rotatably supported around a moving shaft 884.

Further, in the vicinity of the second bearing portion 912, a fan-shaped third fan-shaped gear 913 whose center is the rotation center of the second central movable effect member 910 is provided. The third sector gear 913 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The third sector gear 913 meshes with the second sector gear 904 provided on the first central movable effect member 900 that is arranged adjacent to the right side of the second central movable effect member 910. Further, on the back surface of the second central movable effect member 910, a guided shaft 914 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 914 is adapted to be inserted into the second guide portion 885, and is guided along the extending direction of the second guide portion 885 when the second central movable effect member 910 rotates. This enables the smooth operation of the second central movable effect member 910.

Further, an engaging portion 915 extending rearward is provided near the second bearing portion 912. The engaging portion 915 comes to face the back surface side of the movable production base member 881 through a penetrating portion 888 formed on the left side of the second rotation shaft 884 of the movable production base member 881 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. There is. Then, as shown in FIG. 13B, one end of the torsion coil spring 889 is engaged with the back surface side of the movable effect base member 881. The other end of the torsion coil spring 889 is locked by a locking portion 890 formed on the movable effect base member 881, and the engaging portion 915 of the second central movable effect member 910 is biased upward. It is like this. Accordingly, the biasing force of the torsion coil spring 889 assists in holding the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 at the initial position which is the upper end position in the operation range, and also moves downward. The first center movable effect member 900 and the second movable center effect member 910 that have been operated serve as an aid when returning to the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 12, the third central movable effect member 920 arranged in the lower left portion includes a decoration portion 921 that is decorated and appears on the front surface side of the display device 41. In addition, at one end of the third central movable effect member 920, a third bearing portion 922 is provided which penetrates before and after the third rotation shaft 891 is inserted, and the third central movable effect member 920 is the third time. It is rotatably supported about a moving shaft 891.

Further, in the vicinity of the third bearing portion 922, a fan-shaped fourth fan gear 923 and a fifth fan gear 924 centering on the rotation center of the third central movable effect member 920 are provided. The fourth sector gear 923 is provided so as to face the lower left side when viewed from the front side. The fourth fan gear 923 is adapted to mesh with a gear of a motor 895 arranged in the lower left portion of the third rotation shaft 891 in the movable effect base member 881.

The fifth sector gear 924 is provided so as to face the right side when viewed from the front side. The fifth sector gear 924 meshes with the sixth sector gear 933 provided on the fourth central movable effect member 930 disposed adjacent to the right side of the third central movable effect member 920. As a result, the driving force from the motor 895 received by the fourth sector gear 923 is also transmitted to the fourth central movable effect member 930 via the fifth sector gear 924. Further, on the back surface of the third central movable effect member 920, a guided shaft 925 extending rearward is provided. The guided shaft 925 is adapted to be inserted into the third guide portion 892, and is guided along the extending direction of the third guide portion 892 when the third central movable effect member 920 rotates. This enables the smooth operation of the third central movable effect member 920.

The fourth central movable effect member 930 arranged in the lower right portion includes a decoration portion 931 that is decorated and appears on the front surface side of the display device 41. In addition, at one end of the fourth central movable effect member 930, a fourth bearing portion 932 that penetrates before and after the fourth rotating shaft 893 is inserted is provided. It is rotatably supported about a moving shaft 893.

Further, in the vicinity of the fourth bearing portion 932, a fan-shaped sixth fan gear 933 and a seventh fan gear 934 centering on the rotation center of the fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided. The sixth sector gear 933 is provided so as to face the left side when viewed from the front side. The sixth sector gear 933 meshes with a fifth sector gear 924 provided on the third central movable effect member 920 arranged adjacent to the left side of the fourth central movable effect member 930. In addition, a guided shaft 935 extending rearward is provided on the back surface of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The guided shaft 935 is adapted to be inserted into the fourth guide portion 894, and is guided along the extending direction of the fourth guide portion 894 when the fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates. This enables the fourth central movable effect member 930 to smoothly operate.

The seventh fan gear 934 is provided so as to face the lower right side when viewed from the front side. The seventh sector gear 934 meshes with the eighth sector gear 942 provided on the biasing mechanism 940 arranged at the lower right of the fourth central movable effect member 930. The biasing mechanism 940 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 941 along the front-rear direction and includes an eighth fan gear 942. The biasing mechanism 940 is provided so as to extend to the left from the rotation shaft when viewed from the front side, and is biased downward (counterclockwise direction) by a biasing member (not shown). As a result, the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are urged in the direction toward the initial position which is the lower end position in the operation range. Therefore, the urging force of the urging mechanism assists in holding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 at the initial position, and the third central movable effect member 920 that has moved upward and It assists when the fourth central movable effect member 930 returns to the initial position.

The central movable accessory unit 880 configured as described above can be converted into the initial state shown in FIG. 13 and the operation completed state shown in FIG. In the initial state shown in FIG. 13, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are in the initial position which is the upper end of the operation range, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930. Is at the initial position, which is the lower end of the operating range, and is in a state of being retracted from the front surface of the display device 41.

In this initial state, the sixth light shielding plate 916 is located in the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 is OFF. Further, the seventh light shielding plate 926 is located in the gap between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897 is OFF. That is, in the initial state, both the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are turned off. Based on this, the effect control device 300 can grasp that the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions. ..

Since the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are interlocked, the second central movable effect member 910 must be in the initial position according to the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889. It is also possible to detect that the first central movable effect member 900 is at the initial position by detecting. Since the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are interlocked with each other, the third central movable effect member 920 must be in the initial position according to the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897. It is also possible to detect that the fourth central movable effect member 930 is at the initial position by detecting. Therefore, the effect control device 300, based on that the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are both OFF, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member. It can be understood that 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

From this initial state, when the motor 886 is operated, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 are rotated so as to descend, and when the motor 895 is operated, the third central movable effect member 920 and The fourth central movable effect member 930 rotates so as to rise. Along with this, the sixth light shielding plate 916 is retracted from the detection portion of the sixth detection sensor 889, and the detection result of the sixth detection sensor 889 is turned ON. Further, the seventh light shielding plate 926 is retracted from the detecting portion of the seventh detection sensor 897, and the detection result of the seventh detection sensor 897 is turned on. That is, the effect control device 300, based on that the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 are both OFF, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member. It can be understood that 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in the initial positions.

Therefore, the sixth detection sensor 889 and the seventh detection sensor 897 make up the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect that form the board effect device 44. It forms a position detecting means that can detect the position of the member 930, and also forms a performance accessory switch 47 that detects the initial position.

Then, in the operation completed state shown in FIG. 14, the decorative portion 901 of the first central movable effect member 900, the decorative portion 911 of the second central movable effect member 910, the decorative portion 921 of the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central portion. The decorative portion 931 of the movable effect member 930 is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display device 41. In addition, the end faces of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 are opposed to and close to the end faces of the adjacent decorative portions 901, 911, 921, and 931 to form one annular shape as a whole. ing. Each of the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 is made of a material that does not transmit light, and the portion where the decorative portions 901, 911, 921, 931 are located is in a state in which the display of the display device 41 cannot be viewed from the front.

Next, the configuration of the special variation winning device 38 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2 and FIG. 15 to FIG. 17, the special variation winning device 38 is arranged on the flow path rear wall 962 arranged along the front surface of the game board body 80 and on the front side of the flow path rear wall 962. It is sandwiched between the flow path front wall 952 and a downflow path 38f through which the game balls can flow down in a line. This downflow path 38f is inclined so as to descend to the left when viewed from the front side, and the game balls are arranged to flow down in one row toward the left in one row.

As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the bottom surface of the substantially downward portion of the downflow passage 38f is formed by an opening/closing member 990 that is slidable in the front-rear direction. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17(a), the opening/closing member 990 projects forward and is in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won in the special variation winning device 38 (big winning opening 38d), and FIG. 17(b). As shown in, the game ball can be converted to an open state in which the game ball can be won into the special winning opening 38d by retracting backward. That is, when the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f flows down the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 and passes through the special winning opening 38d, and when the opening/closing member 990 is in the opened state. It is designed to flow into the special winning opening. When the opening/closing member 990 is in the closed state, there is a gap between the opening and closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952, but the gap is such that the game ball cannot flow in.

As shown in FIG. 18, the special variation winning device 38 includes a front wall member 950 including a flow passage front wall 952, a rear wall member 960 including a flow passage rear wall 962, and a main body portion 970 to which an opening/closing member 990 and the like are attached. And a cover member 979 that covers the back surface of the main body portion 970.

The front wall member 950 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The front surface of the front surface portion 951 is arranged in proximity to the back surface of the cover glass 14 of the glass frame 15, so that the game balls do not flow down in front of this front surface. Further, the front surface of the front surface portion 951 is a surface that can be visually recognized by the player, and is decorated and a part thereof is a lens capable of transmitting light. LEDs (not shown) are arranged on the back surface of the front wall member 950 as decoration means, and the special variation winning device 38 can be decorated with light. The color of the light that decorates the special variation winning device 38 is different from the emission color of the collective display device 50, which prevents the display of the adjacent collective display device 50 from being difficult to understand. Further, the upper part of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951 serves as a flow path front wall 952 which forms a front side wall of the downflow passage 38f.

As shown in FIG. 16, a plurality of front wall protrusions 954 protruding rearward are provided on the back surface side of the flow channel front wall 952. The front wall protruding portion 954 is a triangular columnar protruding portion whose left and right side surfaces are sloped, and is located in front of each of the plurality of protruding portions 992 provided on the opening/closing member 990 and slightly upstream of the protruding portion 992. It is provided to be located in. The front wall projecting portion 954 and the projecting portion 992 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing leftward to the rear in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion with which the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f can come into contact. By positioning the front wall protrusion 954 slightly upstream, the game ball flowing leftward is guided rearward by the front wall protrusion 954 and then further rearward by the protrusion 992, The game balls can be effectively guided.

As shown in FIG. 19, the rear surface side of the front wall member 950 is provided with a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 953 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped front surface portion 951. The extension wall 953 has different functions depending on the place where the extension wall 953 is provided. The bottom wall portion 953a forms the bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f, the big winning opening forming portion 953b that forms the side wall and the bottom surface of the big winning opening 38d, and the big winning. A guide passage forming portion 953c that forms a guide passage 955 that guides a game ball that has won a prize in the mouth 38d, a switch attaching portion forming portion 953d that forms an attaching portion 956 that attaches the special winning opening switch 38a, and a general winning opening 35 are formed. It has a function as a peripheral winning wall forming portion 953e and a peripheral wall 953f that prevents the game balls flowing around the special variation winning device 38 from entering the inside.

The bottom surface portion 953a forming the bottom surface of the flow-down path 38f is an inclined surface that is inclined to the right when viewed from the back surface side. In addition, the special winning opening forming portion 953b is inclined so that the game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening 38d are collected in the guide passage 955. Game balls can flow into the guide flow passage 955 in a line, and a special winning opening switch 38a is provided at the inflow portion of the guide flow passage 955. As a result, all the game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening 38d will flow into the guide passage 955 after being detected by the special winning opening switch 38a. The guide flow passage 955 formed by the guide flow passage forming portion 953c is a flow passage that guides the game ball from the special winning opening 38d to the back side of the game board 30, and the back side of the front surface portion 951 is the back side of the game ball. Ribs 957 are formed for guiding to. In addition, the general winning opening forming portion 953e is for forming a general winning opening 35 that opens to the right when viewed from the front side of the special variation winning device 38. Ribs 958 are formed on the back surface of the front surface portion 951 for guiding the game balls flowing into the general winning opening 35 to the rear.

As shown in FIG. 20A, the rear wall member 960 includes a plate-shaped rear surface portion 961. The front wall member 950 is attached to the front surface of the rear surface portion 961. The portion of the front surface of the rear surface portion 961 that is not hidden by the front wall member 950 is decorated. An upper portion of the rear surface portion 961 serves as a flow path rear wall 962 that forms a rear side wall of the downflow passage 38f. An opening/closing member insertion portion 963 is formed at a lower end of the flow path rear wall 962 so as to penetrate the opening/closing member 990 from the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960.

Further, on the front surface side of the flow path rear wall 962, a plurality of rear wall protrusions 964 that protrude forward are provided. As shown in FIG. 16, the rear wall protrusion 964 is a triangular prism-shaped protrusion having left and right side surfaces inclined, and is provided at a position adjacent to a plurality of recesses 993 provided in the opening/closing member 990. The rear wall protrusion 964 and the recess 993 have a function of guiding the game ball flowing leftward to the front in order to meander the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f as described later. That is, it forms a contact portion with which the game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f can come into contact. Since the rear wall projecting portion 964 is provided adjacent to the recess 993, it is possible to prevent the game ball from flowing down the right side portion of the downflow passage 38f in a portion where the recess 993 is not provided, and the game ball is surely held. It becomes possible to meander.

Returning to FIG. 20, the guide passage 955 communicates with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961 in a portion of the central portion of the rear surface portion 961 that faces the portion of the front wall member 950 where the guide passage 955 is formed. A penetrating portion 968 penetrating in the front and back is formed. A switch mounting portion 965 is formed above the guide flow passage 955 so as to pass through the rear portion of the special winning opening switch 38a so as to be able to be housed. Further, in the right side portion of the rear surface portion 961 and the portion facing the portion of the front wall member 950 in which the general winning opening 35 is formed, the game balls winning the general winning opening 35 are transferred to the back surface side of the rear wall member 960. A penetrating portion 966a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed so as to communicate the general winning opening channel 966 to be guided with the rear surface side of the rear surface portion 961.

As shown in FIG. 20B, a plurality of rib-shaped extending walls 967 extending rearward from the rear surface of the plate-shaped rear surface portion 961 are provided on the rear surface side of the rear wall member 960. The extension wall 967 has a different function depending on the place where the extension wall 967 is formed. It has a function as a peripheral wall 967c that forms the periphery of the special variation winning device 38.

The guide flow passage forming portion 967a forms a guide flow passage 955 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 968 to the back side downward. Further, a rib 969 for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream side end portion of the guide passage 955 formed in the rear surface portion 961. The general winning opening channel forming portion 967b forms the general winning opening passage 966 so as to guide the game ball guided from the penetrating portion 966a to the back side downward. Further, a rib 966b for guiding the game ball to the rear is formed at the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed on the rear surface portion 961.

The peripheral wall 967c is formed in conformity with the shape of the penetrating portion that penetrates in the front and back formed in the portion of the game board main body 80 to which the special variation winning device 38 is attached. In this case, the peripheral wall 967c is in a state of being inserted into the penetrating portion. Further, the rear surface of the rear surface portion 961 located outside the peripheral wall 967c is in contact with the front surface of the game board body 80 when the special variation winning device 38 is attached to the game board body 80. A plurality of bosses for positioning and screw holes for screwing are formed in this portion.

As shown in FIG. 21, the main body portion 970 includes a peripheral wall 971 that is aligned with the peripheral wall 967c of the rear wall member 960 in the front-rear direction. The main body portion 970 includes a rear wall portion 972 that faces the guide passage forming portion 967 a formed on the back surface of the rear wall member 960 and forms a rear wall of the guide passage 955. In this rear wall portion 972, at a position facing the penetrating portion 968 formed in the rear wall member 960, the game ball guided to the back surface of the rear wall member 960 through the penetrating portion 968 is introduced into the guide flow passage 955. A rib 973 is formed along the same to guide it to the right. Further, a penetrating portion 974 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the rear wall portion 972 at a position facing the downstream end portion of the guiding flow channel 955 formed in the rear wall member 960. The game ball flowing down the guide flow path 955 is guided rearward by the rib 969 formed on the rear wall member 960, passes through the through portion 974, and is guided to the back side of the main body 970 to the outside of the game machine. It is designed to flow into the discharge flow path for discharging.

In addition, in a portion facing the downstream end of the general winning opening channel 966 formed in the rear wall member 960, a penetrating for guiding a game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 to the back side of the main body section 970. The part 975 is formed. The game ball flowing down the general winning opening channel 966 is guided to the back side of the main body 970 through the penetrating portion 975, detected by the winning opening switch 35a, and then discharged to the outside of the gaming machine. It is designed to flow into the road.

An opening/closing member holding portion 976 that guides and supports the opening/closing member 990 that moves in the front-rear direction is provided at a position facing the opening/closing member insertion portion 963 formed in the rear wall member 960. The opening/closing member holding portion 976 is a slit-shaped penetrating portion that penetrates the front and rear of the main body portion 970, and can come into contact with the upper, lower, left, and right surfaces of the opening/closing member 990 to guide and support the opening/closing member 990. The guide wall 977 is provided so as to extend along the front-rear direction.

An opening/closing member unit 980 including an opening/closing member 990 and an operation mechanism that operates the opening/closing member 990 is attached to the back surface side of the main body 970. The opening/closing member unit 980 includes a unit base member 981 for mounting various members, an opening/closing member 990 slidable in the front-rear direction, and a special winning opening solenoid 38b for operating the opening/closing member 990.

As shown in FIG. 22A, the opening/closing member unit 980 has a state in which the special variation winning device 38 is closed with the opening/closing member 990 protruding forward, and as shown in FIG. 22B. The opening/closing member 990 can be converted into a state in which the member 990 is retracted rearward and the special variation winning device 38 is opened. The opening/closing member 990 can appear above the special winning opening 38d via the opening/closing member holding portion 976 formed on the main body portion 970 and the opening/closing member insertion portion 963 formed on the rear wall member 960.

The opening/closing member 990 is arranged so as to be slidable back and forth in a holding portion 982 formed on an upper portion of the unit base member 981. As shown in FIG. 23A, the opening/closing member 990 is a flow path forming portion 991 that forms a bottom surface of the downflow passage 38f by lowering the front end portion of the upper surface extending above the special winning opening 38d. ing.

A plurality of projecting portions 992 that project upward are formed in the flow path forming portion 991 in the vicinity of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990. The upstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the downstream side, and the game ball flowing down from the right side can be smoothly guided backward toward the recessed portion 993. Further, the downstream side surface of the projecting portion 992 is inclined so that the rear side faces the upstream side, so that it can be guided in the downstream direction when a game ball flowing out from the recess 993 to the front comes into contact.

Further, in the stepped portion of the flow path forming portion 991 which is lowered by one step, which is opposed to the protruding portion 992 in the sliding direction, a recessed portion 993 in which the stepped portion is recessed rearward is formed. The gap between the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 and the side surface of the protruding portion 992 is set so that the game balls can flow down in one line at any position. In addition, the side surface on the downstream side of the side surface of the step portion forming the recess 993 is formed obliquely so that the front side faces the downstream side, and the game ball can smoothly flow out from the recess 993 to the front. There is.

That is, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is provided with undulations such as the protrusion 992 and the recess 993. As will be described later, due to such undulations, the time during which the game ball stays on the opening/closing member 990 is extended.

Further, as shown in FIG. 23(b), the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is an oblique surface that descends to the left, and the game ball is made to flow down to the left. Further, sliding parts 994 extending downward are formed on the left and right sides of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990. The sliding portion 994 is formed so as to extend along the front-rear direction, and by contacting the upper surface of the holding portion 982 formed on the upper portion of the unit base member 981, the opening/closing member 990 on the holding portion 982. It becomes slidable.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22A, the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996 that is inclined so that the lower end is located rearward of the upper end. Since the inclined surface 996 is formed in this manner, when a game ball exists between the opening/closing member 990 and the flow path front wall 952 when the opening/closing member 990 is closed, the game ball is moved upward. Alternatively, the game ball can be released downward.

Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a connecting portion 995 to which a drive arm 983 for transmitting the driving force from the special winning opening solenoid 38b for driving the opening/closing member 990 is formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the opening/closing member 990. ing. The drive arm 983 is located below the holding portion 982. As shown in FIG. 24B, the holding portion 982 is formed with a penetrating portion 982a through which the connecting pin 983a extending upward from the drive arm 983 can be inserted, and the connecting pin 983a is opened and closed through the penetrating portion 982a. It is connected to the connection part 995 of the 990. Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, the holding portion 982 is formed with guide ribs 982b which are located on the left and right of the connecting portion 995 and extend along the front-rear direction. The guide rib 982b guides the opening/closing member 990 in the front-rear direction by guiding the connecting portion 995 in the front-rear direction.

As shown in FIG. 25, one end of the drive arm 983 is connected to a connecting member 984 connected to the special winning opening solenoid 38b. Further, the drive arm 983 is provided with a rotary shaft 983b extending in the up-down direction, and is rotatable around the rotary shaft 983b. The rotating shaft 983b is rotatably held by being sandwiched by the main body 970 and the rear wall member 960 from the front and rear (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 25A, in the state where the special variation winning device 38 is closed, the drive shaft 38g of the special winning opening solenoid 38b extends and the drive arm 983 is positioned at the front end of the rotation range. .. In this state, the drive arm 983 is in the most pivoted state in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back surface side about the pivot shaft 983b, and the connection pin 983a is located at the front end of the movement range.

When opening the special variation winning device 38 from this state, by retracting the drive shaft 38g of the special winning opening solenoid 38b, the drive arm 983 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 983b when viewed from the back side. The connection pin 983a is moved rearward to retract the opening/closing member 990 rearward. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25B, the special variation winning device 38 is brought into an open state. When the special variation winning device 38 is closed, the operation reverse to the above operation is performed.

26 to 29, the manner in which the game balls flow down in the special variation winning device 38 is shown. 28 and 29, a part of the front wall member 950 is seen through for the sake of explanation. The game ball flowing from the right side to the left side of the flow-down path 38f is first guided obliquely to the front side by the rear wall protrusion 964 located on the most upstream side, and flows into the flow path forming portion 991 in the opening/closing member 990. Then, the front wall protrusion 954 guides it obliquely rearward, and the protrusion 992 of the opening/closing member 990 guides it obliquely rearward to flow into the recess 993. The game ball that has flowed into the recess 993 is guided again obliquely forward by the side surface on the downstream side of the recess 993 formed obliquely toward the downstream side and the front wall protrusion 954 adjacent to the downstream side.

After that, the guide to the diagonal rear by the front wall protrusion 954 and the protrusion 992 and the guide to the diagonal front by the recess 993 and the rear wall protrusion 964 are repeated, and the game ball flowing down the downflow path 38f meanders back and forth. While flowing down. As a result, the staying time on the opening/closing member 990 becomes longer than in the case where the front wall protrusion 954, the rear wall protrusion 964, the protrusion 992, and the recess 993 do not have undulations and flow straight down in the downflow passage 38f. It will be. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29(a), the game balls are always present on the opening/closing member 990, and the opening/closing member 990 is opened even when the opening time of the special variation winning device 38 is short. When it is done, as shown in FIG. 29B, it is highly possible that the game ball existing on the opening/closing member 990 will fall and win the special winning opening 38d. Even if the opening is short, the player wins the prize. Can be expected to. In addition, it is preferable to secure the time required for the game balls to stay on the opening/closing member 990 as the interval time for closing the special variation winning device 38 before the short opening round. ..

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30A, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, the game balls staying on the opening/closing member 990 come into contact with the protrusion 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990. As shown in 30(b), it bounces and is guided in a direction away from the special winning opening 38d. In addition, the bouncing game ball may be further separated from the special winning opening 38d by contacting the front wall protrusion 954 of the channel front wall 952, the rear wall protrusion 964 of the channel rear wall 962, and the like. Further, since the projecting portion 992 formed on the opening/closing member 990 is arranged at an interval through which the game ball can pass, the projecting portion 992 may fall through the space without contacting the projecting portion 992. It should be noted that the special variation winning device 38 opening time in the case of a short opening described later is a time in which even a game ball that bounces in contact with the protrusion 992 or the like can flow into the special winning opening 38d as described above. ing. Thereby, even if the opening is short, it is possible to flow into the special winning opening 38d.

By thus providing the protruding portion 992, the front wall protruding portion 954, and the rear wall protruding portion 964, the rolling aspect of the game ball at the time of opening the opening/closing member 990 becomes various, and the interest of the game can be improved. .. Further, when the opening/closing member 990 is opened, it is possible to shift the inflow timing of a plurality of game balls existing on the opening/closing member 990 to the special winning opening 38d, and a ball clogging occurs in the special winning opening 38d. Can be prevented.

Although the front wall protruding portion 954, the rear wall protruding portion 964, the protruding portion 992, and the recessed portion 993 are provided as undulations in the flow-down passage 38f, they may be other than these. For example, a wobbling groove may be formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 as an ups and downs, and the game ball may flow down while meandering along the groove. Further, as an undulation, a rib-shaped protrusion or groove is provided on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 so as to be substantially orthogonal to the flow-down direction, and when the game ball flows down, it is flown down while being moved in the vertical direction by the protrusion or groove. You can

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is provided, and the starting area (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening) provided in the gaming area 32. 97) A variation display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variation display game is a special result. In the machine, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be prized. The special variable prize device 38 is converted into the open state in the special game condition. The special variable prize device 38 is , An opening and closing member that allows the game ball to win from the opening facing upwards and closes the opening in the closed state to disable winning of the game ball and opens the opening in the open state to allow winning of the game ball 990 is provided, the game ball is configured to be able to flow down on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 in the closed state, and the opening/closing member 990 is provided with undulations (protruding portion 992, concave portion 993) on the upper surface, and there is no undulation. Also, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer time. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls during the special game state, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, around the flow-down path 38f constituted by the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990, a contact portion (a front wall projection 954, a rear wall projection 964) with which a game ball flowing down the flow-down path 38f can come in contact is provided. Will be there. Therefore, by contacting the contact portion, the time for which the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 becomes longer, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game. it can.

Also, in the closed state, the game ball is configured to flow down from one of the left and right end portions on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 to the other, and the undulations formed on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 move the flowing game ball back and forth. It is formed to meander. Therefore, the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer period of time, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state and enhance the enjoyment of the game.

The special variation winning device 38 is configured to be opened and closed by the opening/closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction. However, in the closed state, the upper surfaces are in a parallel state so as to cover the special winning opening 38d and the open state is set. May be configured to rotate downward.

In addition, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is provided, and to the starting area (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97) provided in the gaming area 32. In a gaming machine that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of identification information based on the winning of the game ball, and generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result, The game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be prized. The special variable prize device 38 is converted into the open state in the special game condition. Game balls can be won from the facing opening, and in the closed state it projects forward and closes the opening to disable the game ball winning, and in the open state retracts backward and opens the opening to win the game ball An opening/closing member 990 that slides in the front-rear direction is provided to enable the game ball to flow down on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 in the closed state, and the opening/closing member 990 undulates on the upper surface (projection 992). , The recessed portion 993) is provided, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 for a longer time than in the case where there is no undulation, and the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 faces the front end. Thus, the inclined surface 996 is formed so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction is reduced.

Therefore, the opening and closing member 990 is provided with undulations on the upper surface, and the game ball stays on the upper surface of the opening and closing member for a longer time than when there is no undulation, so the game ball in the special game state. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the number of games, and to increase the enjoyment of the game. Further, since the inclined surface 996 is formed at the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 so that the thickness in the direction perpendicular to the sliding direction decreases toward the front end, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught at the time of closing.

Further, the upper surface of the front end portion of the opening/closing member 990 is a flat surface along the sliding direction, and the portion below the upper surface of the opening/closing member 990 is an inclined surface 996. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught at the time of closing, and it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game ball during the special game state by being guided downward by the inclined surface 996, which enhances the enjoyment of the game. it can.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in an integrated manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having the same, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and uses an operation clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock of a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 for generation. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 has a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC 32V from an AC power supply of 24V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a voltage of DC 32V. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal that informs the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430, for example, monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects a power failure occurrence when the voltage drops to, for example, 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A and a storage area of various signals and random number values during game control. Used as. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.), and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state that is advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is achieved, some of the plurality of display results have already been derived and displayed. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. Refers to a display mode that does not exist Then, for example, the reach state includes a state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach). Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same It is also possible to set the state that has become the identification information (excluding the special result mode) to the reach state and to display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as a reach effect with a different possibility of deriving the special result mode (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). Random pattern generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the reach and the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general figure variable display game And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the special figure variation display game to have a game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state (normal probability state or high probability). State), the operating state of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state (time-saving operating state (universal support state)), the number of starting memory, etc., based on any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables. Select and acquire the fluctuation pattern table. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation allocation information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win a prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, a start opening 2 switch in the normal variation winning device 37. 37a, the start opening 3 switch 97a in the second start winning opening 97, the gate switch 34a in the universal figure starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and these switches There is provided an interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V, which is supplied from, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the input range of the proximity I/F 121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or the proximity switch is illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut to float. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above, and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are the second input. It is input to the port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is detected. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 and the like are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 and asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on a radio wave detected by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be accepted), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (Signal output when detecting that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full)), touch switch signal (input to the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) There is provided a first input port 122 which takes in a signal based on) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set in the ports of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET needs to be reset in order to prevent malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for informing the test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of the special symbol information of the variable display game and a signal indicating the probability state of a big hit through the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test firing test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-shooting test apparatus.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a special variable winning device 38 (a special winning opening solenoid) 38b and a movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 a solenoid (genuine solenoid) 37c. A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening/closing data. Also, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. The fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, for example. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

In addition, the output unit 130 receives a opening/closing data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the universal solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit) 138a. , A second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71. Is provided.

To the first driver 138a, DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for extracting the digit line according to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential pulls out the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 450. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit/receive data to/from the inspection device 450 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.
The production control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 according to a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and a storage content even if power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that is a time counting unit that generates information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of the solenoid, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a waiting state for receiving the interrupt signals INT0 to INT and the command or data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) To receive. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls the board decoration device 46 having the LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the information display device 630. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15 is provided. Further, a board effect movable body control circuit 334 for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) is provided. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, as the board effect device 44, the first lower movable member 740, 741, the second lower movable member 770, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, the second upper movable member 860, the A first central movable effect member 900, a second central movable effect member 910, a third central movable effect member 920, and a fourth central movable effect member 930 are provided.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. In addition, even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device is provided. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 detects the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, the initial position of the board effect device 44, and the like. A function of detecting the on/off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 are detected. A switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct-current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, DC5V serving as a power supply voltage for the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker. Is configured to. Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. In addition, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward a game area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 from the game area 32. Emitted. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, the normal variation winning device 37 or the special variation winning device 38, a number corresponding to the type of the winning opening won. The prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 31) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 31) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided, and the game area 32 is provided. When the game ball hit in passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of memory for starting normal figure starting is the upper limit number (for example, 4) based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the starting gate for normal figure 34. If less than), the number of ordinary figure starting memory is added (+1) and one ordinary figure starting memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memory of the universal figure start winning is displayed on the universal figure hold indicator of the collective display device 50. Further, in the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for determination of hit (random number value for determination) for determining the result of the universal figure variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored. It is supposed to be done.

Then, if there is a general figure starting memory and the general figure variable display game can be started, that is, the general figure variable display game is not running, the general figure variable display game hits and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state. If the hit state is not the hit state, the hit judgment random number value stored in the first-mentioned normal figure starting memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit state of the normal figure variable display game is judged. Then, the processing for starting the universal figure variation display game is performed. When the random number for hit determination coincides with the determination value, the general figure variable display game is a win and a specific result mode (normal figure specification result) is derived.

Further, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns for a predetermined variation time on the public figure display provided in the collective display device 50 as a process for executing the general figure variable display game. After performing the universal figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed in the order, the process of displaying the universal figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. It should be noted that the general-drawing display device is configured by the display device 41, and, for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc. are normally used as the identification information, and these are variably displayed for a predetermined time, then stopped and displayed to display the result. You may.

When the result of the universal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern that is one of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol, which has a special result mode on the universal figure display, is stopped according to the type of hit At the same time as displaying, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated to perform the control of opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the general-picture variation display game is off, control is performed to display a lighting pattern on the public-picture display unit, which is the result mode of the off-going.

The winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning ball to the ordinary variable winning device 37 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided inside, respectively. It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) of the first starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winning in the first starting winning opening 36 is set. In addition to being stored in the limit, the second starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the winning to the second starting winning opening 97 and the normal variation winning device 37, is limited to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). Remember. Based on the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the winning to the normal variation winning device 37, a big hit random number value, a big hit pattern random number value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information. And the extracted random number value is stored in the RAM 111B as the first starting memory and the second starting memory. The number of stored starting memories is displayed on the special display 1 reserved display and the special drawing 2 reserved display of the collective display device 50, and is also displayed as a decorative special drawing start storage display on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Is displayed. Further, it is also displayed on the information display device 630.

When the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game is ready to start, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game to be started. The generated big hit determination random number value is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process for determining the hitting deviation of the special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure variation display game to be executed to the effect control device 300.

When the first special figure variation display game is executed, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 1 display 51 (variation display device) over a predetermined variation time. After performing the special character 1 changing display, the processing for displaying the first special character changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed. In the case of executing the second special figure variable display game, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order on the special figure 2 display device 52 (variable display device) over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the special figure 2 changing display, a process of displaying the second special figure changing display game in which the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, in the display device 41 (variable display device) or the information display device 630 corresponding to the special figure variable display game (for example, A process for displaying a decorative special figure variable display game in which numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, setting of effect state, output of sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, processing for controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, for example, the decorative special symbol (identification information) formed by the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display area (first special symbol) and the right variation display area ( 2nd special symbol), in each of the medium variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, after a predetermined time, the symbols that are changing are stopped in order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area, and stopped in each of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as the appearance of characters are performed for the purpose of improving the interest. Further, in the decorative special figure variable display game on the information display device 630, the light emitting member is made to blink during variable display, and when the stop time is reached, the light emitting member is made to emit light in accordance with the result of the special figure variable display game (lighting, blinking, extinction). Etc.). That is, the result mode is displayed by the decoration special pattern (fourth pattern) configured by the light emitting mode of the light emitting member.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, gives a special result mode or a small hit result mode to the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special view 2 display device 52. While displaying the lighting pattern, processing for generating a special game state or a small hit game state is performed. Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 or the information display device 630 is also the special result mode or the small hit result mode.

In the process of generating the special game state or the small hitting game state, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 opens the opening/closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38 by the special winning opening solenoid 38b, for example, to play in the special winning opening. Performs control that enables the inflow of spheres. Then, until a condition that either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is won in the special winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Opening is set as one round, and control (cycle game) for continuing (repeating) this for a predetermined number of rounds is performed. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high-probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal-probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation game. Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a time saving state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (typical figure probability) is a high probability (typical figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (typical figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the normal state low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in this embodiment, the universal figure probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the figure change display game (the figure change time) is, for example, 500 msec, and the figure stop time for displaying the result of the figure change display game is, for example, 600 msec. When the normal figure variation display game is a hit result and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first hit stop pattern (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 msec×1 time), Opening time of the second hit stop design (normal power open time) and number of releases (for example, 1700 msec x 2 times), Open time of third hit stop pattern (normal power open time) and number of releases (for example, 1700 msec x 3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity open, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the ordinary variation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-mentioned universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure fluctuation time) to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec. 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is set to the normal state (normal figure low probability state). It is possible to control such that the second opening time is longer than the one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of opening the normal electric power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure changing display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, four times) to the second number of times of opening. In the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the figure variation display game (universal figure probability) is higher than the normal probability in the normal operation state (general figure low probability state, for example, 1/251). The probability (universal figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) can be used.

In the time saving state, the general variation prize winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

The special display 1 display 51 and the special display 2 display 52 may be separate display or the same display, but each special display variation display so as not to be executed independently or at the same time. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use different display devices or different display areas for the first special figure variable display game and the second special figure variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. However, the decoration special variable display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. Further, the gaming machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

Although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the starting opening 3 in the second starting winning opening 97. The switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are provided with coils for magnetic detection, and a non-contact for detecting a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coils. Type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like is a micro switch having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 33 and 34 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 37 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, first, the process of inhibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area where the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, the register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and the leading 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and the process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the sub-control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instruction from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (the game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer is timed using a storage area (a RAM area or a register or the like that is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of validity determination (checksum calculation) of RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 can be reliably performed. Can be detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the lapse of the waiting time, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting the lapse of the waiting time, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on to the lapse of the waiting time. Need to continue. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it will be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed when turning on the power Can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). When the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of power failure due to noise, etc. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a defect at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown have been retained, so backup processing will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0. Is determined (step S12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has expired, access is permitted to the RWM (read/write memory) capable of reading and writing such as RAM and EEPROM (step S13). ), OFF data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port that is pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read in advance. Then, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

When the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17), and the normal operation is performed. If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), checksum calculation processing for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power-off It is determined whether the checksums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG. 34, and the process for normal recovery from the power failure is performed.

Moreover, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y) or when the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 34 and initialization processing is performed. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

In step S21 of FIG. 34, the initial value when power is restored is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In addition, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. Indefinite. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed. Then, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when the probability of the special figure is not high (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. If the probability of the special figure is high (step S22; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30. The ON (lighting) data of is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the process number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S25), and step S31. Go to. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, first, a model designation command is transmitted, and further, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a power failure recovery command, a screen designation command (waiting for customer). If so, send multiple commands such as a customer wait demo screen command, otherwise a recovery screen command). Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibition area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal status monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area related to the customer waiting demonstration area and the setting of the effect mode. Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the present embodiment, in step S30, first, a model designation command is transmitted, and further, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (customer waiting demo screen is displayed. Along with the display, a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a performance number information command and a high probability number information command are also transmitted. That is, the model designation command is first transmitted to the performance control device 300 both when the power is restored and when the RAM is initialized, and the model designation command is controlled after the game machine is powered on. This is the first information transmitted to the device 300.

In step S31, processing for activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, the bit transposed pattern of the hard random number (here, the big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining the winning symbol of the special drawing). Predetermined RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number determining the hit of the universal figure (random number per hit), random number determining the hit symbol of the universal figure (random symbol per hit)) After saving in the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated by using the random numbers generated by the random number generation circuit. Is configured. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the unit of timer interrupt processing. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random-type update in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times (for example, two) to check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 through the port and the data bus is set (step S36), and the power failure occurs. It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By allowing the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main processing, the initial value random number updating processing in step S35 described above includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating processing in the timer interrupt processing as well. In order to prevent the value random number updating process from being executed, when performing the initial value random number updating process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update the interrupt to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number update process. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not kept on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, if the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily interrupting (step S39) is executed. A process of outputting the off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ), wait until the power to the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), and the main control means delays the start of the main control means when the power is turned on and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting the start of the slave control device (game control device 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring occurrence of power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation section (initialization switch) which can be operated from the outside, and the initialization operation section being operated. It is provided with an initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 35 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the calculated address is set to the start address of the RWM (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set to the calculated value (step S53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is calculated. It is determined whether the calculation of is completed (step S57). When the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 36 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update processing, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is a small hit of the special symbol variation display game It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the stop symbol. In addition, "winning initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the universal figure fluctuation display game, and "hit symbol initial value random number" is the random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the universal figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that becomes the initial value. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.
Incidentally, the small hit random number does not naturally exist in the model without the small hit. Further, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no random number for the initial winning symbol.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 37 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening solenoid 38b, universal electric solenoid 37c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 of the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating the launch permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal indicating the launch permission state seen from the payout control device (the launch permission signal) is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the firing control device. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 by various processes, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107). After that, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 97a, the universal gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a. Alternatively, a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) for monitoring an error (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is performed. Further, a special figure game process (step S109) that performs a process relating to the special figure changing display game and a general figure game process (step S110) that performs processing relating to the general figure changing display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111) for driving the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying the special figure variation display game and various information regarding the game so as to display desired contents, the magnetic sensor 61. Magnet irregularity monitoring processing (step S112) for checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio irregularity for checking the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are performed by the interrupt return. At this time (at the end of timer interrupt processing), it is automatically performed. Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt-disabled state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of the bit is cleared (step S122).

Then, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). ), and prepares the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S127), and a switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in the RWM or another memory.

Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). After that, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit in the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared. Is prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process ends.

The unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 are different data, but as a result, they may have the same value. is there.
Further, the bit data to be inverted in the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted in the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, but as a result, they may have the same value. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal input to the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is set. It is saved (stored) in (step S144). After that, it waits until the delay time until the second reading (for example, about 100 μsec) elapses (step S145).

When the delay time has elapsed, the state of the signal input to the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is set. It is saved (stored) in (step S149). After that, a deterministic bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 1 and the bit having a different state is 1 is created in the first and second readings (step S150), and the logical product of the deterministic bit pattern and the port input state 2 is calculated. It is determined bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the bit having the same state is 0 and the different bit is 1 is created in the first read and the second read (step S152), and the logic of the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is obtained and set as the previously held bit (step S153). This makes it possible to obtain the state of the signal from which noise due to chattering of the switch is removed. Then, the current confirmed bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the current confirmed state (step S154), the exclusive OR of the previous time and the current confirmed state is taken, and the result is saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Switch read processing ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 msec), the switch is read once for each interrupt processing and compared with the result of the previous reading to obtain the signal. There is a method of judging whether or not there is a change, but if it does so, correct judgment may not be possible if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost by the time of the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned inconvenience.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S104) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs the data of the segment of the collective display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data output to the output port 134 which outputs the data of the ordinary electric solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b is combined and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S163). S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, "door/frame open" data, "security signal" data) is output to a digit/external information output port. The data is output to 136 (step S166).
After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output output port 135 (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special display 1 display 51, the special display 2 display 52, the general display, the special display 1 hold display, and the special display 2 hold, which are various displays provided in the collective display device 50, are provided. The display unit, the public figure reservation display unit, the round display unit and the second game state display unit are dynamically lit.

Subsequently, various output data of external information are combined (step S169), and the combined data (for example, "big hit signal 1" data, "big hit signal 2" data, "big hit signal 3" data, "big hit signal" 4” data, “symbol fixed number signal” data, “starting mouth signal” data, “main prize ball signal” data) and launch permission output data are combined (step S170), and the combined data is obtained. The external information/launch permission signal is output to the output port 137 (step S171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. Yes (step S174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70. (Step S175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 41, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information on the prize ball command.

The number-of-wins counter area 2 is for transmitting a main award ball signal to be output to an external device each time the number of award balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning the prize is reached to a predetermined number (here, 10). In the area to be used, winning data corresponding to prize balls for which the main prize ball signal has not been generated is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 constitutes a main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout prize ball signal is output from the payout control device 200 to the external device each time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor illegal payouts by comparing these two signals.

In each of these prize number counter areas, there is a prize number counter area for each number of prize balls set for each prize hole (in the present embodiment, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Is provided, and the count number of the corresponding prize number counter area is incremented by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The prize number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the prize number counter area 2 so that more prize data can be stored. This is because while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, so that more untransmitted This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in each of the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the fourteen prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the fourteen prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are each configured to store up to 255 prizes.

In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 2 (step S181), “0” is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked among the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. Determine whether there is a count number that is not. Then, if there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is checked whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

When it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 is set. The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area is added to the acquired number of payouts (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S187). As the value of the remaining number of prize balls area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

Then, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. When the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, every time the number of remaining prize balls reaches 10, the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls (step S191), and the process returns to step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with winning of the game balls to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of the game balls is concentrated during a big hit, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game balls, so It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of special prize balls cannot be counted.
Here, the processing of steps S181 to S191 is processing of updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the processing of steps S192 to S201 is processing of transmitting a payout command.

In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). When the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. When the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control. When the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control, the payout busy signal indicates an on state (busy state). To be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal is a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

When this payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmitting process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time has elapsed (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 side can pay out the prize ball. If it is in a state, it is configured to send a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform wasteful processing by not performing the subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

Conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy state) are, for example, during payout operation, during ball lending operation, during shot ball out error, during overflow error, during frame radio wave illegal occurrence, payout ball detection switch (paid ball). The number of award balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 (the number of award balls not yet paid out = the number of remaining game balls remaining) ) (When not equal to 0), etc.

When the payout busy signal is not busy (step S194; N), it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the number-of-wins counter area 1 (step S195), "0" is set in the number-of-wins counter area to be checked among the plurality of number-of-wins counter areas provided for each number of prize balls. It is determined whether there is a count number that is not.

Then, if there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196) to check whether the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas have been checked. The determination is made (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step S197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks are not completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 to repeat the above process. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area→10 prize ball counter area→14 prize ball counter area.

If it is determined in step S195 that there is a count number (step S195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 is set. The payout amount command corresponding to the address is acquired (step S199). Then, the obtained payout number command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 msec, for example, is set as an initial value.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control can start the payout control. In this case, the prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting the prize ball command to the payout control means is formed.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the prize is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not yet been paid out will be held in the game control device 100 side, so that it will be backed up in the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and backed up in the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without the function for performing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 42 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the big hit symbol random number is waiting for initial value setting (step S211; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in the register (start value setting register) (step S213). Then, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the universal symbol is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). In addition, when the small hitting pattern random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hitting symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial of the loaded small hitting symbol random number. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) which holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

When the hit random number of the universal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). If the hit random number of the universal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the hit initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the loaded random number of the hit figure is initialized next time. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). After that, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number of the ordinary figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

When the hit symbol random number of the ordinary figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Further, when the hit symbol random number of the universal symbol is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S221), and the hit symbol random number of the loaded universal symbol is set. The next initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number updating process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 43 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1) as the fluctuation pattern random numbers, and the random number updating process 2 updates both of them. The update target is switched and processed each time an interrupt occurs. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the upper byte and the lower byte are updated at different interrupt times. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. Is configured.

In the random number updating process 2, first, a random number updating scan counter for sequentially designating which random number among a plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the present updating process is updated (step S231). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. When the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when it is “1”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when it is “2”, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 (lower) is changed. The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is “3”, the variable pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has completed one round.

Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as the gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter, referred to as “R register”) used for refreshing the DRAM, etc. In addition, a counter called "M1 counter" that operates equivalently to the R register is built in, and the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). Randomness can be given to the random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). Note that the mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1. Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As the mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 bit of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte is added value (hereinafter, this Is referred to as a "masked value") is set to a mask update value obtained by adding "1", the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the added value ( The process proceeds to step S238) and step S239. It should be noted that the reason why "1" is added to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), and proceeds to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value (1) of the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. (Byte) is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step S243). When the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the lower random number area of the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random number value (step S244), and this value is set to 1 The data is saved in the lower random number area of the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in the higher random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), and the random number update process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated on the effect random number update table (1 byte random number, 2 byte random number (upper), 2 byte random number (lower)) , The address of the update area, etc. are defined for each type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among the various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. It constitutes a random number updating means for updating the variation pattern random number for.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
FIG. 44 shows a winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this prize-winning switch/state monitoring process, first, a prize-winning mouth monitoring table corresponding to the prize-winning mouth switch 38a in the prize-winning entrance (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and the prize-winning opening is opened. Despite that there is no fraudulent winning in the big winning opening, the fraud & winning monitoring process (step S304) of detecting a normal winning is executed.

In the winning hole monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input to the target switch, the lower address of the fraud monitoring information, the lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, the fraudulent winning error notification command, the fraudulent winning The number upper limit value (the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the information of the notification timer update information (permission/update) are defined. In addition to the number of times the monitoring is repeated (the number of switches), the winning table of the winning port monitoring table includes a monitoring switch bit, a lower address of the winning number counter area 1, and a winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The information of the lower address of is defined. The prize hole monitoring table is prepared in accordance with each switch to be monitored.

Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in Poden (step S305), monitor whether there is an illegal winning, and detect fraud & winning monitoring processing to detect a normal winning. (Step S306) is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 3 switch 97a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which does not require the fraudulent monitoring processing is prepared (step S307), and the winning a prize is won. The winning number counter updating process (step S308) for updating the number is performed.

Next, the state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals whose states should be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the status scan counter of is updated in the range of 0 to 3. After that, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", the switch abnormality output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like Monitoring of the state based on the 1 signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set. R.

Next, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the status scan counter (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the state scan counter is referred to the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, and when the value of the state scan counter is “0”, it is based on the signal output from the glass frame opening detection switch 63. The state monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "1", the state monitoring is set based on the signal output from the main frame opening detection switch 64. When the value of the status scan counter is "2", the status monitoring based on the frame radio wave incorrect signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is "3", the status monitoring based on the touch switch signal is monitored. Is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring process is executed. finish. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines the status such as whether an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to a disconnection of the switch connector or the like. Monitoring of conditions based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

After that, the payout control device 200 performs a payout busy signal check process (step S317) for checking a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control can be started, and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process. Note that the processing of steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is "0", and therefore is executed once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 msec, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 msec.

[Illegal & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 45 shows the fraud & winning prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, S306) in the above-described winning hole switch/state monitoring process. The fraud & winning award monitoring process is a process performed on the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. With regard to the big winning opening (special variation winning device 38) and Hoden (ordinary variation winning device 37), it is easy to open the opening/closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to monitoring fraud.

In the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch of the error monitoring target is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is the special winning port switch 38a, and the winning port switch targeted for error monitoring is started. In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning a prize device 37 is executed based on the hit of the ordinary figure.

When it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of illegal prizes is updated by +1 (step S324), and the updated number of illegal prizes is equal to or larger than the number of fraud occurrence determinations of the monitoring target. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of the present embodiment, the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations is set to 5 regardless of the type of winning hole switch that is the object of error monitoring, but the number of fraudulent occurrences is different for each type of winning hole switch. You can also The determination number is set to five, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the game ball is in the effective period of the big winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being determined to be illegal when a prize is passed after passing or when there is noise on a signal, and to not easily determine an error even if it is not illegal.

If the number of fraudulent winning prizes is not equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number of monitored objects (step S325; N), a winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330). If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number of the monitoring target (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prize determinations is kept at the fraudulent occurrence determination number (step S326), and the initial value is set in the target fraudulent prize notification timer area. (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraud command is prepared (step S328), a fraud prize generation flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). ).

On the other hand, when the fraud monitoring period is not in progress (step S322; N), the prize-winning port monitoring table of the target prize-winning port switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter updating process (step S331) for setting the prize ball is performed. To do. If the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S332). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S333), and if the value is not 0 (step S333; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S333; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancellation command is prepared (step S334), and the fraud prize cancellation flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step S335). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336).

When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in this fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of illegal prizes is cleared ( In step S337), the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S336; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value in the fraud flag area (step S338).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S338; Y), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S338; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S339), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S340), the fraud & winning a prize monitoring process ends. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an incorrect prize winning error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, and the start and end of error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning prize counter update processing]
FIG. 46 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In the prize number counter updating process, first, the number of prize hole switches to be monitored is acquired from the prize hole monitoring table (step S351), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize hole switch (to be exact, a change in input). The determination is made (step S352).

When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether overflow occurs (step S355). If no overflow has occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for prize balls (transmission of payout command) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0 to 65535).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step S357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S358), and it is determined whether or not overflow occurs (step S359). If no overflow has occurred (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). , It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main prize ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0 to 255).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is finished (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is finished. By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 47 shows the gaming machine status check processing (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-described winning opening switch/status monitoring processing. In this gaming machine status check processing, first, a status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step S371), and it is determined whether or not the signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table (winning prize switch/game machine status monitoring table prepared in the status monitoring process). This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and the signal. ON determination data, status off command (error notification end command in case of error system), status on command (error notification start command in case of error system), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

When the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step S374). After that, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S375), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), it means that the error signal is not an error (normal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), the state ON flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the target state ON command is acquired and prepared (step S377). After that, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step S379). If the target signal is ON (step S372; Y), it means that the error-based signal indicates an error (abnormal or illegal), and the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is touched. Is a state indicating.

When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state match (step S379; Y), that is, when the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382). , It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or larger than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). When the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step S379; N), that is, when the signal status changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step S380). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step S381), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382), and it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S382). Step S383).

When the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state checking process is ended. If the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value -1 is retained (step S384). The status flag that has been set is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check processing ends. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the effect command setting process is executed. After performing (step S387), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 48 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-described winning opening switch/state monitoring process. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start the payout control.

When the payout busy signal is ON (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (step S393), It is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal status region matches the current signal status (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (step S395). , It is determined whether or not the value in the busy signal status region matches the current signal status (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

When the value in the busy signal status area does not match the current signal status (step S396; N), the current signal status is saved in the busy signal status area (step S397) and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. Then (step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value in the busy signal status area matches the current signal status (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400), and if it is not greater than or equal to the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The pay-out busy signal check process ends. In addition, when it is equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the value is kept at the comparison value -1 (step S401), and prepared in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the pay-out busy signal flag area (step S402), and the pay-out busy signal check processing is ended.

By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the status of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, but the busy signal status is changed if the changed status continues for the signal confirmation time. It is hard to be affected by such as.

Further, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the signal fixing time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the power failure is restored, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and immediately recognizes that the payout process can be immediately performed, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being lost.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special figure game processing, the inputs of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 97a are monitored, the entire processing relating to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the display of the special drawing is set.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the special figure game process, first, a starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if a game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted to win the winning. Before the start of the special figure variation display game, the game result pre-judgment for pre-judging the game result based on the winning is performed.

Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, refer to branch to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A7).

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the variation start setting and effect setting of the special figure variation display game and the special figure variation are in progress. Special figure normal processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure stop display time is set, and information required for performing the special figure displaying process is set. (Step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and a special winning opening for each big hit A special figure display process (step A10) is performed to set the fanfare time according to the opening pattern and to set the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval process.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the special winning opening, the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. are performed. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, or the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A12) for setting information necessary for performing the ball process is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and the big hit ending process are executed. The special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for the execution is performed.
When the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit ending process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

In step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to perform the opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, and the processing during the small hit. A small hit fanfare processing (step A15) for setting necessary information is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is "8", a small hit mid-process (step A16) is performed to set an ending command and information necessary to perform the small hit remaining ball process. ..
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is "9", a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls won in the special winning opening during the small hit medium process and a small hit ending process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
When the special figure game process number is "10" in step A7, a small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure normal process.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A20) relating to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A22) which relates to the special figure 2 indicator 52 is done, ends special figure game processing To do. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

The small hit is a result mode in which the condition device is not operated, and the big hit is a special result in which the condition device is operated. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and special condition as a special electric accessory. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning device 38 is set (the continuous accessory operating device is operated). When the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag which is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch which is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the starting port switch monitoring process, first, a first starting port (first starting winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set. The information indicating that the prize has been won is set. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the first starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 1 (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (supporting normal electric power) (step A104). ).

When it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing is being shortened (step A104; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) does not win unless left-handed, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 does not win unless right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the game state in which the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed is a gaming state, but when there is a winning in the first starting opening during the time-shortened (that is, when left-handed is hit during the time-shortened) In addition, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information on the hold by the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set. The information indicating that the prize has been won is set. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the second starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting opening (step A111; N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is in operation, that is, the ordinary variation. It is determined whether or not the prize winning device 37 is operated and the gaming ball is in the open state in which the prize can be won (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric auditors are operating (step A112; Y), The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (step A113).

At step A113, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud determination number (for example, 5). In the normally variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. If the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

When it is determined in step A113 that the unauthorized use of the universal denial is not occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114), After the special figure starting port switch common process (step A115) is performed, the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed. Further, when it is determined in step A113 that the illegal call is occurring (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, a third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) winning award monitoring table is prepared (step A116), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A117) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition processing, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 3 switch 97a here), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and the target starting port is set. The information indicating that the prize has been won is set. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the third starting opening which is the starting opening of the special figure 2 (step A118).
When it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning in the third starting port (step A118; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A118 that there is a winning in the third starting opening (step A118; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (supporting normal electric power) (step A119). ).

When it is determined in step A119 that it is not during the special drawing time saving (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A119 that the special drawing is in a short time (step A119; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. .. That is, in the time saving state, a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A120) and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) does not win if the player does not hit left, and the normal variable winning device 37 does not win unless he hits right. Therefore, in the time-saving state, the right-handed state is more advantageous in the gaming state than the left-handed state, but when there is a winning in the third starting opening during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). In the above, the right control instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) for instructing the right control.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A122), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A123) is performed to monitor the starting opening switch. The process ends.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110, A117) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), a second starting opening (normal variation winning device 37), and a third starting opening (second starting winning opening). No winning information of the starting mouth to be monitored out of the mouth 97) is set (step A131), and the starting mouth to be monitored among the starting mouth 1 switch 36a, the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, and the starting mouth 3 switch 97a. It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch (step A132).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends.
On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A132; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A133), and it is determined whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134). ..

When there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A134; N), that is, when the random number is not extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A134; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A135). Then, of the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36), the second starting opening (ordinary variation winning device 37), and the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97), the winning opening to be monitored is won. The presence information is set (step A136), and the hard random number acquisition process ends.

[Common processing for special figure start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (steps A108, A115, A123) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a are input.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the special figure starting port switch common processing, first, of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a, the number of winnings to the starting port switch to be monitored is determined. The number of times the starting opening signal is output, which is the number of times information about the output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and the number of outputs overflows. It is determined (step A143).
If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output number area of the RWM (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, when the output count overflows (step A143; Y), the process proceeds to step A145. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by the +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows and not saved.

Next, of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97a, whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value. The determination is made (step A145).
If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.
If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (special map 1 reserved number or special map 2 reserved number) is updated by +1 ( Step A146), prepare a starter switch to be monitored and a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform effect command setting processing (step A148), and target start mouth winning flag. Is saved (step A149). Continuously, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number is calculated (step A150), and the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, and A117 is RWM. Is saved in the jackpot random number storage area (step A151). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A152), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This big hit symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A160).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in this embodiment) are saved in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A154). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning is through the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A155). When it is determined in step A155 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A155; N), the process proceeds to step A158. On the other hand, in step A155, when it is determined that the winning is to the first starting opening (step A155; Y), the small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A156), and the small hit symbol of RWM. The data is saved in the random number storage area (step A157). At step A158, the address (any place from hold 1 to 8) of the variable order flag storage area corresponding to the total of the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number is calculated (step A158), and the calculated area is calculated. Then, the variation order flag of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is saved (step A159), special figure hold information determination processing (step A160) is performed, and the special figure starting port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37. As a starting memory that is the right to execute the variable display game, the starting memory means stores a predetermined number up to the upper limit. In addition, the starting storage means (game control device 100) is a random number value extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 which is the starting opening of the special FIG. Various random number values that are stored as start-up memory and are extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97 which is the starting opening of Toku-zu 2 and the normal variation winning device 37 are second started up to a predetermined number. Remember as a memory.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A160) in the common figure starting opening switch common processing described above will be described. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the starting memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

As shown in FIG. 53, first, a big-hit determination process (step A161) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit random number value matches the big-hit determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A162; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target opening switch is set (step A163), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A152 is set. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A164), and the process proceeds to step A171.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A162; N), it is determined whether or not the winning is in the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A165).
When it is determined in step A165 that the winning is not in the first starting opening (step A165; N), the stop symbol information of the outlier is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A165 that the winning is the first start opening (step A165; Y), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value, which means that the small hit is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A166) is performed to determine whether or not. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A167; N), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (step A170), and the process proceeds to step A171.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A167; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A168), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A156 is set. After acquisition (step A169), the process proceeds to step A171.

Then, a read-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A171), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A172). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A173) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A173). A174).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A175), and effect command setting processing is performed. (Step A176), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. The special figure information setting process in step A173 and the variation pattern setting process in step A174 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, a read-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory of the pre-reading target, and a read-ahead variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. And transmitted to the performance control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure changing display game. It becomes possible to inform.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment etc.) Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. Good.

[Winning prize switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the special winning opening switch monitoring processing, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening opening processing is being performed (step A201). .. When the special winning opening opening process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step S201). A202).

When the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, whether the small hitting processing is being performed (step A203). ). If processing is being performed during the small hit (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Further, when the small hitting process is not being performed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball process is being performed (step A204). Since the special figure game process number does not shift until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number in this way.

When the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If the small hit remaining ball is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. Then, the winning counter is set to "0" (step A205), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206).

When there is no input to the special winning opening switch (step A206; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). If there is an input to the special winning opening switch (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214) and the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
When the value of the winning prize counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening remaining ball process is being performed (step A215).
When the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening remaining ball processing is not in progress (step A215; N), the small hit remaining ball processing It is determined whether it is in progress (step A216).
When the small hit remaining balls are being processed (step A216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and when the small hit remaining balls are not being processed (step A216; N), the value of the winning counter is the big winning. It is added to the mouth count number (step A217), and it is determined whether or not the big winning mouth count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, "9") (step A218).

When the special winning opening count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count number is kept at the upper limit value (step A219), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( (Step A220), it is determined whether or not the small hit is being processed (step A221). When not being processed during the small hit (step A221; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when being processed during small hit (step A221; Y), the small winning opening control pointer area is hit small. The value of the end of the opening operation is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening will be closed and the first round will be completed.

[Special processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether both the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number are “0” (step A301).
In step A301, if it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number and the special figure 2 pending number are not both “0” (step A301; N), a flag is loaded from the variable order flag storage area (for a total of 1 pending numbers). Then, (step A302), it is determined whether or not the current variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A303).
When it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A303; Y), a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number is prepared (step A304), The effect command setting process (step A305) is performed, the special figure 1 variation start process (step A306) is performed, and the special figure normal process is ended. At this point, the special figure 1 reservation number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, a command (decorative special figure reservation number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value is prepared.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A303 that the current variation is not the variation in special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, when the current variation is the variation in special figure 2, the number of pending special figure 2 is dealt with. A decorative special figure reservation number command to be prepared is prepared (step A307), effect command setting processing (step A308) is performed, special figure 2 variation start processing (step A309) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is ended. At this point, the special figure 2 reservation number is not updated by -1, but in step A307, a command (decorative special figure reservation number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value is prepared.

When it is determined in step A301 that both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started ( If the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A310) (step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.
Next, as the process number, "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set (step A314), the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared ( Step A316). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal process is ended.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A306) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 56, first, the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (step A321), and the first special figure is displayed. The big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A322) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A324) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A325). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) of setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process of setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to fluctuation start of special figure 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is set in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area ( For example, 52 msec) is saved (step A333), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start processing is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

As shown in FIG. 57, first, a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the variation symbol determination flag area (step A341), and the second special figure is displayed. The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the variable display game is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A342) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which is the parameter for setting the variation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). After that, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Next, "1" for the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 changing signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) is set in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area ( For example, 104 msec) is saved (step A353), the initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 58 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the above-mentioned Toku-zu 1 variation start process. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A361), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A362). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (step A363), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. Yes (step A364). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage having the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest of the special figures 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A365) for determining whether or not it is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

When the result of the jackpot determination process (step A365) is a jackpot (step A366; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A362 (step A367). ), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A365) is not a big hit (step A366; N), whether or not the prepared big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. The small hit determination process (step A368) is performed.

When the result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is a small hit (step A369; Y), the small hit flag area in which the deviation information is saved in step A361 is overwritten and saved. (Step A370), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A368) is not the small hit (step A369; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed with the deviation information saved in both the big hit flag 1 region and the small hit flag region. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “outfall”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 59 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 variation start process. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0. (Step A372). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed to determine whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A374) is a jackpot (step A375; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area in which the deviation information is saved in step A371 (step A375). ), and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure variation display game is any one of "big hit" and "outlier".

[Big hit determination processing]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A161, A365, A374) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, jackpot flag 1 setting processing, and jackpot flag 2 setting processing. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, when the big hit judging process is the big hit judging process (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, and when the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a hit, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit judging process is the big hit judging process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), it is out. Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is judged whether or not it is in the high probability state (step A383).

If it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If it is not in the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ..

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A357), and the big hit judgment process is ended. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A365) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), it is small. Since it is a hit or a hit, "other than a big hit (small hit or miss)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, and if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), it is out of alignment. , “Other than big hit (out)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
When the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, when it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the big hit judgment process is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 61 shows the small hit determination processing (steps A166 and A368) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing and large hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, the small hit determination is performed using the same random number as the big hit determination (big hit random number). That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a series of multiple values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the upper limit of the small hit judgment value, which is the upper limit value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is the deviation, the deviation is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value. (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is the deviation, the deviation is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is the small hit, the small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394), and the small hit judgment process is ended. To do.

[Special map 1 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 62, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process is shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (the number of holding 1 Big hit symbol random number is loaded from (for) (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit design table is set (step A403), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and saved in the special design 1 stop design number area (step A404). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special figure 1 big hit stop design information table is set (step A405), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol indicator (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409).

These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts when the hit occurs, and the destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes depending on the type of the hit symbol (the type of the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol). In addition, when the particular big hit design (for example, 4R probability variation design) among the big hits in special figure 1, if the game state is in probability variation, the production mode of the transfer destination is determined to be probability variation. It is determined whether or not the effect mode is set to the effect mode, or it is difficult to distinguish whether the effect mode is the probable change or not. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and when it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for the number of holding 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol design table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
After that, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), and the miss stop symbol pattern is set in the stop symbol pattern area. It saves (step A417) and prepares a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop pattern pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. This decoration special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422), and the special figure 1 The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
In FIG. 63, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process is shown. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1 (For) the big hit symbol random number is loaded (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A434). By this processing, the type of special result is selected.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A435), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display device (here, the special symbol 2 display device 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and the probability variation determination is performed. It saves in the data area (step A438), and saves the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of falling off is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Then, (step A441), a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and effect command setting processing (step A444) is performed. This decoration special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reserved 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446), and the special figure 2 Stop the symbol setting process.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second start winning opening (normal variation winning prize). It constitutes a variable display game executing means for executing the second variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variable display game execution control means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (steps A173, A324, A344) in the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and special figure 2 variation start processing will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low/high probability, with/without time reduction) does not affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes is set according to the probability state, the presence/absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

In the special figure information setting process as shown in FIG. 64, first, the first-half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 area is saved with the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of holdings is large when the number of holdings is large. Therefore, in cases other than the case where the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuations. It should be noted that the fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns.When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting processing is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of pending calls only in the case of failure (reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of pending calls is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the above-mentioned special figure reservation information determination processing, special figure 1 variation start processing, and variation pattern setting processing (steps A174, A326, and A346) at the start of special figure 2 variation will be described. The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern that is the variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state and the second half variation that is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set first.

As shown in FIG. 65, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A471), the addresses of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 are acquired and prepared (step A471). A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and prepared (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different for hitting and for deviating. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the hit occurrence rate, and even 1 byte is sufficient, so the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of 2 bytes is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the rate of occurrence of hitting, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for deviating is 2 bytes.

Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is off (step A474), and if it is off (step A474; Y), a 2-byte allocation process (step A475) is performed, and then step A477 is executed. Move to processing. If it is not out (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1), Prepare (step A478). Then, the distribution process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and the latter half variation number area is saved (step A480). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A481), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1), and the preparation is performed. Yes (step A484). After that, the distribution processing (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the first half variation number area is saved (step A486), and the variation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 66 shows the distribution processing (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting processing. The distribution process is performed by selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or selecting the latter half variation selection table from the latter half variation selection table based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the processing for selecting the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) of the special figure variation display game based on the variation pattern random number 3 from the first half variation selection table. is there.

In this distribution process, first, the first data of the target selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A477, or the former half fluctuation selection table prepared in step A483) It is checked whether is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A2201). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number), and are assigned a predetermined value. However, in the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value “0”, that is, the code without allocation, is specified at the beginning.

If the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is the code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distribution result The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing is ended.
On the other hand, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is not the code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half variation group table) The first distribution value specified in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203).

Subsequently, a new random number value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2203 from the random number value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A473, A478 or A484. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (step A2205). When the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then the determination value determined in step A2205 of the previous time is acquired. A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).
The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). As a result, at least one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table). Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).
When it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process ends. To do.

[2-byte sorting process]
FIG. 67 shows the 2-byte allocation process (step A475) in the above-described fluctuation pattern setting process. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution processing, first, it is checked whether the leading data of the selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A2301). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), since distribution is not necessary, the distribution value “0”, that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

If the leading data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A2307) and 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.
On the other hand, if the leading data of the selection table (latter half variation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), the one distribution value initially specified in the selection table (latter half variation group table) is acquired. Yes (step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value prepared in step A473 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A2304), and the calculated new random number is calculated. It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303, and thereafter. Perform processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305 to obtain a new distribution value. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table).
When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (step A2307), and the 2-byte sorting process is performed. To finish.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 66 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 67 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for the distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes. In that respect, the program instructions for calculating are different.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A327 and A347) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A499), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A504). Further, the variable order flag storage area is shifted (step A505), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A506), and the variation start information setting process is ended.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining a fluctuation pattern of the identification information executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the decoration display variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern and a stop information command including information about extending stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during fluctuation of special map]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the special figure changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the changing symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, 600 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the big hit symbol pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time, and the stop symbol is set. When the pattern is a small hit pattern, 2000 msec is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, "2" relating to the special figure displaying process is set as the process number (step A605), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A606). Furthermore, the signal regarding the fluctuation end of special figure 1 (for example, the signal during special symbol 1 fluctuation OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal regarding fluctuation end of special figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Saving the signal during fluctuation (OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A608), the control timer initial value in the symbol determination frequency signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal (For example, 256 msec) is saved (step A609). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51, the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 1 display device 51 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A610). ), as a control information of the special figure 2 variation display game on the special figure 2 display device 52, a stop flag related to a variation stop on the special figure 2 display device 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A611), and the special figure changing process is ended.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the special figure displaying process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM's Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process are loaded. (Step A703), processing of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM (step A704). Then, it is judged whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is judged as a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special big hit 2 big hit) is started. Save the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 is ON signal) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the jackpot flag 2 is not the jackpot (step A705; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is the jackpot (step A706) and the jackpot is the jackpot (step A706). A706; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device operating signal is ON, a character continuously operating device operating signal is ON, which is related to the start of the big hit of the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 big hit), The signal per special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and the process for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (“16” or “4” in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired, and the RWM is obtained. In the upper limit number of rounds area (step A710). Then, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop design pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the ordinary figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step) A717) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1 (4R probability change (probability))), and the jackpot without a jackpot (the jackpot) When the opening information is the special winning opening opening information 1 (4R probability change (probability)), it is ON during a big hit during a time saving state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit is a big hit and is OFF when the big hit is a big hit.

After that, the big winning opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the general figure fluctuation display game and special figure fluctuation display game After setting (step A719), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the time saving state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the special game state is finished is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, the special winning opening illegal prize number area of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) corresponding to the special opening opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning opening corresponding to the special opening opening information The fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Then, the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure displaying processing is ended. That is, the game control device 100 converts the special variation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means for generating a state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
When it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is the small hit (step A725; Y), the time shortening variation number update processing (step A726) and the effect mode information check processing regarding the effect mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A729) to set the effect command. Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the probability of the special figure is high (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). After that, the small hit fanfare processing transition setting processing 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure displaying processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not the small hit (step A725; N), the time shortening variation number update processing (step A735) and the effect mode information check processing regarding the effect mode setting (step S725) A736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or may be the same value in any of the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes. It may be (rotation speed), or may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
In step A738, when it is determined that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and special figure display is performed. Medium processing ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switch preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and the effect command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), special figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing prefetch production from being performed a few rotations before the production mode is switched. By transmitting the production mode switching preparation command to the production control device 300, production is performed across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions from occurring.

[Time reduction change count update process]
Next, details of the time shortening variation number updating process (steps A726 and A735) in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the time shortening variation number update processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure high probability (in the high probability state) is present (step A751). When it is in the special figure high probability (step A751; Y), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. If the special figure high probability is not in progress (step A751; N), it is determined whether or not time saving is in progress (step A752). Then, when it is not during the time saving (step A752; N), the time shortening variation number updating process is ended. If the time saving is in progress (step A752; Y), the number of time shortening fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A753), and it is determined whether the number of time shortening fluctuations has become "0" (step A754).

When the number of times of time shortening variation is not "0" (step A754; N), the processing of updating the number of times of time shortening variation is ended. When the number of time shortening fluctuations is “0” (step A754; Y), a signal related to the end of time saving (for example, two big hit signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area. Then, a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area. Save.

Next, save the number without saving time in the game state display number area (step A757), save the figure low probability flag in the figure game mode flag area (step A758), and draw the special figure in the special figure game mode flag area. The low probability & no time saving flag is saved (step A759). Next, a signal related to a left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A760), and a display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) during the right-handed operation is displayed. In order to turn off the light, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A761), and the time shortening variation number updating process is ended.

[Production mode information check processing]
Next, details of the effect mode information check process (steps A727 and A736) in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a code without update (step A771). When the next mode transition information is the code without update (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special figure variation display games that have been executed, for example, when the effect mode that continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. ..

If the next mode transition information is not the no-update code (step A771; N), the production remaining rotational speed, which is the executable number of times of the special figure variation display game until the production mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). Then, it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed is "0" (step A773). When the effect remaining rotation speed is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check processing is ended. Further, when the effect remaining rotation speed becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , The address of the table corresponding to the next mode shift information is acquired (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotational speed in the RWM is acquired. The information is saved in the area (step A677), the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the information is saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (step A678). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A780). When the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A780; Y), that is, when the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check processing is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A782). Perform effect command setting processing (step A782).
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A785), and effect command setting processing (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the new effect mode is the left-handed mode (step A787), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (step A787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), effect command setting processing (step A789) is performed, and effect mode information check processing ends. To do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in which the switching of the effect mode is announced in advance before the specified number of rotations. By managing the effect mode in the game control device 100 in this way, it becomes possible to perform control such as generating a specific reach only in the specific effect mode, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 1 (step A724) in the above-described special figure displaying processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” relating to the fanfare/interval processing is set (step A791), and the special figure game processing number area is processed. The number is saved (step A792).

Next, save the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (big hit + small hit), big hit 4 signal is ON (big hit is output)) in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a high probability state and a signal related to the end of the time saving state (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off), and the test signal output data area is saved (step A794). In addition, even in the special figure high probability, the general figure only changes the probability state, so the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric auditors product 1 opening extension state signal are always turned off. After that, the number-of-rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), the number without saving time is saved in the gaming-state display number area (step A796), and the universal figure game mode flag is set. The universal figure low probability flag is saved in the area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high-probability notification flag area is provided in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display section) provided on the game board 30 relating to the display of the high-probability state. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the time saving state is performed. The time reduction variation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are entered.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode shift information area (step A805). .. Then, a signal related to the right-handing instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the display LED during the right-handing (for example, the second gaming state display portion) is turned on. To do so, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 1 ends. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the above-described special figure displaying process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 75, in the small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing 1, first, "7" relating to the small hitting fanfare processing is set as a processing number (step A811), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing. It is saved in the number area (step A812).

Next, save the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and output a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one big hit signal is output (big hit + small hit). )) is saved in the external information output data area (step A814), and a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A815).

Next, the special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A816), and the fraud monitoring outside-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A817).
Next, the signal regarding the right-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A818), and the indicator LED (for example, the first gaming state display portion 57) during the right-handed operation is turned on. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A819), and the small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting process 1 ends.

[Processing during fanfare/interval]
Next, details of the fanfare/interval processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). , Production command setting processing (step A903) is performed.

After that, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is the acquired open switching determination. It is determined whether the value is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the special winning opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) for short opening (second opening mode) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, the special winning opening opening process transition setting process (step A909) is performed, and the fanfare/interval process is completed.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the special winning opening time (for example, 29 seconds) for long opening (first opening mode) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. The game is saved (step A908), the special winning opening opening processing transition setting processing (step A909) is performed, and the fanfare/interval processing is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the big hit pattern, 16R certainty variation A (all long open), 16R certainty variation B (1 to 4R long open, 5 to 16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), 4R probability variation (all short open) is set. The probability variation is a big hit that the probability state after the special game state ends is a high probability state, and the normal is a big hit that the probability state after the end of the special game state is a low probability state. Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, 16R probability variation A data and opening switching determination value “0”, 16R probability variation B data and opening switching determination value “4”, 16R normal A data and opening switching determination value “0”, 16R normal B data, open switching determination value "4", 4R probability variation data and open switching determination value "0" are stored in association with each other. A long opening operation is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, and a short opening operation is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[Transition setting process during special winning opening]
FIG. 77 shows the special winning opening opening process transition setting process (step A909) in the above-described fanfare/interval process. In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the special winning opening opening process (step A911), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A912). After that, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A913), and the number of winnings to the special winning opening is stored. The information in the winning hole count number area is cleared (step A914). Then, the on-data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening opening process transition setting process is ended.

[Processing during opening of the special winning opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the special winning opening opening process, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1002), the open switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired (step A1003), and It is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the obtained open switching determination value (step A1004).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), the remaining ball processing time for short closing (for example, 1.4 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), Preparing the interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A1007), performing the effect command setting process (step A1010), performing the special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A1011), and opening the special winning opening. The process ends.

If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; N), the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step S1004). A1006), prepare an interval command (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011), and end special winning opening opening processing. To do.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), the remaining remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and the special game state ends. Prepare an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the time (step A1009), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011), The process of opening the special winning opening is ended.

[Prize winning hole remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 79 shows the special winning opening remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011) in the processing during the opening of the special winning opening. In this special winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A1021), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the opening/closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, the OFF data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the big winning opening remains. The sphere processing transition setting processing ends.

[Remaining sphere processing of big winning mouth]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) in the above special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the special winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current round number in the special gaming state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM to determine the current round. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

When the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A1101; N), the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A1102), and the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information is acquired. Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in the special game state is larger than the obtained open switching determination value (step A1105), and when the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109. Process shifts to. If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening release information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106).

Here, the rank-down effect corresponds to an effect of notifying that the subsequent round will be a short open round. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, 16R probability variation A (all open long), 16R probability variation B (1-4R long open, 5-16R short open), 16R normal A (all long open), 16R normal B( (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), a predetermined jackpot round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from the jackpot round 1R to 3R, and at the 4th round. Execute the round notification effect. If the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variation A or 16R normal B (all open long), it is notified that the long open will continue in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is long open in the rounds after the 5th round. Will be opened at. Further, if the selected jackpot pattern is 16R probability variation B or 16R normal B (1 to 4R is long open, 5 to 16R is short open), rank down effect is performed in the round continuous notification effect and short open is performed. This is notified, and the special winning opening will be opened with a short opening in the rounds after the 5th round.

When the special winning opening opening information is not the value of the rank-down performance system (step A1106; N), the processing moves to step A1109. Further, when the special winning opening opening information is a value of the rank down effect system (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process moves to step A1109. Further, when the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, when the number of rounds is 4R, the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) is set (step S1107). A1108) and the process proceeds to step A1109. Note that the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), and the fanfare/inter-interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed to perform the special winning opening remaining ball processing. To finish.

On the other hand, if the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1101; Y). A1111), the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1112), and the set ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is set in the special figure game processing timer area. It is saved (step A1113). After that, the big hit ending process shift setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the special winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare/interval interval processing transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 81 shows the fanfare/inter-interval process shift setting process 2 (step A1110) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process. In this fanfare/interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number "3" relating to the fanfare/interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1121). A1122).
Next, a signal related to the end of opening the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (for example, the special electric auditors product 1 operating signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1123), and the fanfare/interval is set. The middle processing shift setting processing 2 is ended.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 82 shows the big hit ending process shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-described special winning opening remaining ball process. In this big hit ending process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit ending process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). After that, a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (for example, the signal during the operation of the special electric auditors product 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

Next, the information in the special winning opening count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1134), and the information in the round number area that stores the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1135). ), the information of the round number upper limit value area that stores the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (step A1136). Then, the information of the round number upper limit value information area that stores the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A1137), and the special winning opening opening information area that stores the flag for determining the opening information of the special winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit ending process transition setting process is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit ending process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability variation determination flag set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the special game state this time has a high probability after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the high probability data is set when the state is set (step A1201).

When it is not high probability data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A1202), and when it is high probability data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A1203). ), a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A1204), and command setting processing (step A1205) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, an effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A1206). Then, by referring to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A1207). Furthermore, the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotational speed area (step A1208), and the mode shifts to the mode next to the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1209).

After that, a command corresponding to a new effect mode number is prepared (step A1210), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A1211), and a command setting process (step A1212) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1213), and the big hit ending process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 84 shows the big hit end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the big hit end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

Next, the general figure high probability & general electric power support flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1223), and the special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1224). After that, the probability information command (time saving) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1225), and the time reduction variation number initial value (for example, 100) is saved in the time reduction variation number area (step A1226), and the big hit ends. The setting process 1 ends.

Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the initial value of the number of time saving changes (for example, 100) in the number of time saving changes area, the time saving state is ended by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times (for example 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 85 shows the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the big hit end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal regarding the start of high probability is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231), and a signal regarding the start of high probability is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

Next, the general figure high probability & general electric power support flag is saved in the general figure game mode flag area (step A1233), and the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1234). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1235), the time shortening variation number area is cleared (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. By the above processing, after the special game state ends, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the high probability state and the state becomes short until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a specific game state (time saving state) that extends the period during which the normal variation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. It constitutes a state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 2]
FIG. 86 shows the special figure normal process shift setting process 2 (step A1219) in the big hit ending process described above. In the special figure normal process shift setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). ..

Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal of the big hit is turned off, 3 signals of the big hit are turned off, 4 signals of the big hit are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243), and a signal related to the end of the big hit (eg, The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 hit signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Then, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1248), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. To finish.

[Small hit fanfare processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting fanfare processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 87(a), in the small hitting fanfare middle processing, small hitting middle processing shift setting processing (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hit medium processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit mid-process shift setting process (step A1301) in the above small hit fanfare mid process will be described. As shown in FIG. 87(b), in the small hit medium processing transition setting processing, first, "8" relating to the small hit medium processing is set as a processing number (step A1311), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing. It is saved in the number area (step A1312).

Next, the opening time of the special winning opening in the small hit game (for example, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 The operation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Next, in order to open the opening/closing member 990 of the special variation winning device 38, ON data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, the information of the special winning hole count number area that stores the number of winnings to the special winning opening is cleared (step A1316), and the small hit operation initial value (for example, "0") is saved in the small hit mid-control pointer area. (Step A1317), the small hit mid processing shift setting processing ends.

[Processing during small hits]
Next, the details of the small hitting process (step A16) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 88, in the small hit medium processing, first, the value of the small hit medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and whether the loaded value is the small hit operation end value (for example, “6”) or more. Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not greater than or equal to the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting medium control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting movement transition setting process (step A1404) is performed to make a small hit. The hitting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the small hit operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is within the special figure high probability. It is determined whether the flag is a flag (step A1406). In this way, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit in the special figure high probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in effect.
When the loaded flag is a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; Y), the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit processing is ended. If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1406; N), the command for the small hit end screen is prepared (step A1407), and the effect command setting process (step A1408) is performed. The small hit remaining ball process shift setting process (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit mid-process is ended.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting movement transition setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hitting process will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in the small hit operation transition setting process, a branch process (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (control pointer during small hit).

In step A1411, if the control pointer is "0", "2", or "4", the wait time (eg 1500 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412), Off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hit operation transition setting process ends.
If the control pointers are "1", "3", and "5" in step A1411, the special winning opening opening time (for example, 200 msec) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414), the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1415), and the small hit operation transition setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 msec, the opening of 200 msec and the closing of 1500 msec are alternately performed, and the control pointer during the small hit is sequentially set at the end of the opening and at the end of the closing. Will be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 msec opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 msec opening to the first 1500 msec closing), the small hit midway control pointer is updated to "0", and At the end of the first 1500 msec closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500 msec closing to the second 200 msec opening), the control pointer during small hit is updated to "1", and the second 200 msec opening The control pointer during small hit is updated to "2" at the end, the control pointer during small hit is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 msec closing, and the control during small hit is finished at the end of the third 200 msec opening The pointer is updated to “4”, and the control pointer during small hit is updated to “5” at the end of the third 1500 msec closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 msec opening, the control pointer during the small hit is updated to "6", and after the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 msec and the subsequent small hit ending time of 100 msec, the small hit occurs. The condition ends. Therefore, after the fourth opening of 200 msec and the closing of 2000 msec, the apparent ending time is 2000 msec.

[Small hit remaining ball processing transfer setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) in the above-described small hitting processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 90, in the small hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, "9" relating to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as a processing number (step A1421), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing number. The data is saved in the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), and the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424). The hit remaining ball processing transition setting processing ends.

[Small hit remaining ball treatment]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball process (step A17) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 91A, in the small hit remaining ball process, a small hit end process shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end processing transition setting processing]
Next, details of the small hit ending process transition setting process (step A1501) in the small hit remaining ball process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 91(b), in the small hit end process transition setting process, first, "10" relating to the small hit end process is set as a process number (step A1511), and the process number is set to the special figure game process. It is saved in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal related to the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric auditor 1 working signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, the information of the special winning opening count area is cleared (step A1515), the information of the small hit midway control pointer area is cleared (for example, 0) (step A1516), and the small hit end processing transition setting processing is ended. ..

[Small hit end processing]
Next, details of the small hit ending process (step A18) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 92, in the small hit ending process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to a high special figure probability (step A1601). Step A1602).
When the loaded flag is not a flag related to the high probability of special figure (step A1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A1603), and the effect mode set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) The address of the table corresponding to the migration information is acquired (step A1604).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776) to obtain the effect remaining rotational speed of the effect mode to be transferred, and the effect remaining rotational speed in the RAM. The information is saved in the area (step A1606), the next mode transfer information of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the information is saved in the next mode transfer information area in the RWM (step A1607). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area upon power failure recovery (step A1610). Perform effect command setting processing (step A1611).
Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation speed is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A1614), and effect command setting processing (step A1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a left-handed mode (step A1616), and if it is not the left-handed mode (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is left-handed (step A1616; Y), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after performing the effect command setting process (step A1618), the process proceeds to step A1619. Transition.

Then, the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag relating to special figure time saving (time saving state) (step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special figure time saving (step A1620; Y), the special figure normal process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit ending process is ended.
If the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special time saving and shortening (step A1620; N), a signal relating to a left-handed instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1620). A1621), in order to turn off the indicator LED for right hitting (for example, the first gaming status display portion 57), save the number under left hitting in the gaming status display number 2 area (step A1622). The process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit ending process is ended.

[Special figure normal processing migration setting processing 3]
Next, details of the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-mentioned small hit ending process will be described. As shown in FIG. 93, in the special figure normal process shift setting process, first, "0" relating to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A1631), and the process number is set in the special figure game process number area. It is saved (step A1632).

Then, save the signal related to the end of the small hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal is OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the end related signal of the small hit (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is OFF). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is ended.

[Production command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 94, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
When the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the production serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the performance serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), command data (MODE) is written to the performance serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the production serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the production serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the production serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process ends.
Note that the effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 95 shows the symbol variation control process (steps A20 and A22) in the special figure game process described above, and the symbol variation control process (step B15) in the universal figure game process described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) and ordinary symbols (general symbols) and setting display data of the special symbols and ordinary symbols.

In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether or not the variation control flag for the symbol to be controlled (for example, one of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the general symbol) is changing (step A2101). .. In the case of the present embodiment, on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, step B14, the lower address of the variation control flag area, the initial value of the blink control timer, the variation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( Addresses for stop) and addresses for display table 1 (for fluctuation) are defined.

When the changing flag related to the control target symbol is changing (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step A2103). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for fluctuation) is defined on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process ends.

If the blink control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blink control timer initial value corresponding to the target blink timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variable symbol number of the control target. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and the display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process ends.

On the other hand, when the changing flag related to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stop) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21, and step B14.
Next, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area of the control target is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure variation display game). ), a value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer, and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer in the fluctuation control table of the public figure (general figure variation display game). Has been done. This blinking control timer initial value is the interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the varying time.

The corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the variable symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variable control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variable symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the variable symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variable symbol number is set to 0, and the variable symbol number is 0 (variable symbol number upper limit judgment value -1. ) Is sequentially updated within the range. In steps A2108 and A2111, the display data (lighting pattern) according to the variable symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of performing the above, the display for one cycle is repeated.

Here, 8 is defined as the variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the first special symbol (first special symbol variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated in the range of 0 to 7. Therefore, the special figure 1 changing display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the first special figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern eight times. Further, 2 is defined as the variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the second special symbol (second special symbol variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 changing display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the second special figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern twice. Further, 4 is defined as the variable symbol number upper limit determination value in the variable control table of the universal symbol (general symbol variable display game), and the variable symbol number can be updated within the range of 0 to 3. Therefore, the general figure changing display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the general figure changing display game is completed by updating the lighting pattern four times.

In this way, by defining the blinking control timer initial value and the variable symbol number upper limit value in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 make one round. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the universal figure game process, first, the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the universal electric prize switch for monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the universal figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

If the value of the universal figure game processing timer is “0” (step B4; Y), that is, if it is determined that the time has expired or has already expired, it is referred to branch to the processing corresponding to the universal figure game processing number. A process of setting the universal figure game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and a process of acquiring a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number is performed using the table (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the universal figure game processing number (step B7).

In step B7, if the general figure game processing number is “0”, the start of variation of the general figure variable display game is monitored, and the setting of variation start of the general figure variable display game, the setting of the effect, and the variation of general figure are in progress. An ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) for setting information necessary for performing the process is performed.
When the figure game process number is "1" in step B7, a figure figure changing process (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the figure image displaying process.

In step B7, if the universal figure game processing number is "2", and if the result of the universal figure variable display game is a hit, the universal battery open time is set according to whether or not the state is in a time saving state. Alternatively, the processing for displaying a general figure (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the processing for a general figure.
Further, in step B7, if the universal figure game process number is "3", the process is continued during the universal figure hit, or the information necessary for performing the ordinary ball remaining ball process is set. The process (step B11) is performed.

If the universal figure game process number is "4" at step B7, the ordinary electric ball remaining process (step B12) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the universal figure end process.
Further, in step B7, when the figure/universal figure game processing number is "5", the per-universal-university-person ending processing (step B13) for setting information necessary for performing the figure/universal figure ordinary processing is executed.

After that, after preparing a universal figure fluctuation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure display (step B14), a symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal figure display (step B15) ) Is performed to end the general-university game processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. To do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described general-university game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 97, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is right-handed (for example, during a big hit, during a small hit, during special time saving (during normal power support)). (Step B102).
If the game state is right-handed (step B102; Y), the number of reserved universal figures is acquired and it is determined whether the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit value (for example, "4") (step B105). If the game is not in the right-handed gaming state (step B102; N), a left-handed instruction command is prepared (step B103), and after performing the effect command setting process (step B104), the number of universal figure holdings is acquired. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved universal maps is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

If the number of reserved universal figures is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the number of reserved universal figures is incremented by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved universal figures is updated. (Step B107). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B108), the hit symbol random number is extracted, and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step B109), and the gate switch monitoring process To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B105 that the number of universal figure reservations is not less than the upper limit value (step B105; N), The gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, in the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process, first, during the ordinary figure winning, that is, when the ordinary figure changing display game is in the hit state, the ordinary changing winning apparatus 37 is performing a predetermined number of opening operations. It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, when the normal drawing is in progress (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202), and there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B203).

Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the post-update counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value (for example, "6") (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B204; Y). Then, the value of the operation end (for example, "4") is saved in the control pointer area during the universal figure hit (step B205), the universal figure game processing timer is cleared to 0 (step B206), and the prize winning switch monitoring process is performed. finish. That is, if there is a prize winning over the upper limit value in the hit state of the universal figure, the hit state of the universal figure ends at that point.

Further, when it is determined in step B201 that the normal drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), when it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the ordinary electric power count number is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B204; N), the ordinary electric power prize switch monitoring processing is ended.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (step B8) in the above-mentioned ordinary figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the normal/universal figure normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal/universal figure reservation number is "0" (step B301), and when the normal/universal figure reservation number is "0" (step B201; Y). ) Performs the ordinary figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step B321), and ends the ordinary figure normal process. In addition, when the general figure reservation number is not “0” (step B301; N), the random number is stored from the RWM per random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) and the per symbol random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) ( In step B302), the hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of a hit result being normal in the universal figure variation display game is normal. It is determined whether the probability that the figure is higher than the probability (that is, the probability that the figure is low) is high, that is, whether the state is in a time saving state (step B304).

When it is not during the high probability of universal figure (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower limit determination value) at the low probability of universal figure is set (step B305), and when it is during the high probability of universal figure (step B304). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of high probability of universal figure (step B306).
After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307). It is determined whether the value is less than the lower limit determination value set by (step B308).

If the value of the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y), or if the value of the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the hit flag. Save the deviation information in the area (step B309), set the deviation stop symbol number (step B310), save the deviation symbol information in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B311), and stop the regular symbol number Save in the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312), and the hit information loaded in step B302 is entered. The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is the regular symbol stop symbol. The data is saved in the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at the time of low probability of universal figure is 0/251, the probability of hitting at the time of high probability of universal figure is 250/251, the upper limit judgment value is “251”, and the lower probability lower limit judgment value is “251” and the high probability lower limit determination value are “1”.
Therefore, at the time of low probability of universal figure, there is a deviation when the value of the random number per hit is "0" to "250".
Further, at the time of high probability of universal figure, the case where the value of the random number per hit is any of "1" to "250" is a hit, and the case where the value of the random number per hit is "0" is out of range.

After saving the stop symbol number in the universal symbol stop symbol area (step B315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
After that, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the vacant area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the universal figure reservation number is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, a process of moving up the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 one by one. I do. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved universal figures of 4 in the random number storage area per universal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved universal figures is decremented by one.
Then, the routine change process transition setting processing (step B320) is performed, and the routine figure normal processing ends.

[Purpose normal processing migration setting processing 1]
FIG. 100 shows the normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step B321) in the normal figure normal processing described above, and the normal figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step B508) in the normal figure displaying processing described later. .. In the general/universal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for transitioning to the general/universal figure normal process (step B331), and the process number is saved in the general/universal figure game process number area (step S331). B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the universal figure normal process shift setting process 1 is ended.

[Usually changing the processing during the transition process]
FIG. 101 shows the process of setting the process of transitioning to a universal figure during the above-described universal figure normal process (step B320). In this routine figure changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the process number for transitioning to the routine figure changing process (step B341), and the process number is saved in the routine figure game process number area ( Step B342).
After that, the figure change time (for example, 500 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, the figure change time is common between the figure low probability state and the figure high probability state) in the figure game processing timer area. Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 variation signal is ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and vary the universal figure variation display game. The during-change flag indicating that it is in the middle is saved in the universal figure change control flag area (step B345).
Then, the blinking control timer initial value (here, 52 ms), which is the initial value of the blinking cycle timer of the universal figure display, is saved in the universal figure blinking control timer area (step B346), and the universal figure changing process transition setting process is performed. To finish.

[Processing during fluctuations in general]
Next, details of the routine figure changing process (step B9) in the routine figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 102(a), in the process of changing the public figure, a process of setting the transition to the general figure display (step B401) is performed.

[Processing transition setting process during normal figure display]
Next, the details of the process of setting the process of displaying a general figure during the process of changing the general figure (step B401) will be described. As shown in FIG. 102(b), in the process of setting processing for displaying general figure display, first, the process number is set to "2" as a setting process for shifting to processing for displaying general figure (step B411), and the process is executed. The number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B412). After that, the universal figure display time (for example, 600 msec) that is the display time of the result of the universal figure variation display game on the universal figure display is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B413), and a signal regarding the end of variation of the universal figure display is made. (For example, the normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the figure changing display game is stopped is saved in the figure changing control flag area. Then (step B415), the process transition setting process during the process of displaying the universal figure is completed.

[Processing during normal figure display]
Next, details of the general figure displaying process (step B10) in the above general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the normal figure displaying process, first, the hit flag (hit information or deviant information) set in the normal figure normal process is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

When the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the normal figure normal process shift setting process 1 (step B508) for shifting to the normal figure normal process is performed, and the process of displaying the normal figure is ended.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B503; Y), the hitting process setting table is set (step B504), and the value of the hit start pointer (for example, "0" ,” “2”, or “4”) is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B505). Next, the universal communication opening time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 msec) corresponding to the universal figure stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B506). After that, the process for setting the transition to the ordinary figure is set (step B211), and the processing for displaying the ordinary figure ends.

[Purpose per medium processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 104 shows a process of setting transition to normal figure processing transition processing (step B507) in the above-described processing of displaying a general figure. In the process of setting processing for hitting ordinary figure hitting, first, "3" is set as a processing number for shifting to processing for hitting ordinary figure (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the figure figure processing number area. (Step B512). After that, the test signal output data is a signal related to hitting the universal figure variation display game (for example, a normal symbol 1 hitting signal is ON) and a signal related to the start of the universal electric actuation (for example, an ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON). The data is saved in the area (step B513), and the ON data is saved in the ordinary solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the ordinary solenoid (step B514).

Further, the information on the Poden count number area that stores the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 during the fraud monitoring period is stored. The information in the fraudulent prize number area is cleared (step B516). Then, the flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 (flag outside the fraud monitoring period) is saved in the ordinary electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B517), and the processing transfer setting process during the per-universal figure end is completed. To do.

[Usually hit processing]
Next, details of the during-universal-game hitting process (step B11) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in the processing for hitting a universal figure, first, a control pointer for hitting a universal figure is loaded and prepared (step B601). It is determined (step B602).

When the value of the control pointer during hitting the universal figure is not equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; N), the control pointer during hitting the universal figure is updated by +1 (step B603), and the normal power operation shift setting process (step B604) is performed. Go and finish the process in the middle of a normal figure.
In addition, when the value of the control pointer for hitting the ordinary figure is equal to or more than the upper limit value (step B602; Y), the processing for moving the control pointer pointer for hitting the ordinary figure in step B603 is not updated by +1 and the operation shifts to the normal power operation. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process of hitting a normal figure ends.

[Uden operation transition setting process]
FIG. 106 shows the normal power operation shift setting process (step B604) in the above-described general-universal-stroke process. The normal power operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the driving of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer (control pointer during normal drawing). I am trying. In the normal power operation shift setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

If the value of the control pointer is "0" or "2", the process proceeds to step B612 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that after the closing of the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer. Saves the wait time in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B612) and saves the OFF data in the normal electric solenoid output data area to turn off the normal electric solenoid 37c (step B613), and sets the normal electric power transfer setting. The process ends.

If the value of the control pointer is "1" or "3", the process proceeds to step B614 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, and thus the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is opened. The ordinary electric opening time which is the opening time is saved in the ordinary figure game processing timer area (step B614), and the ON data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area to turn on the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (step B615). The normal operation shift setting process ends.

When the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616, the opening control of the normal variation winning device 37 is ended, and the normal ball remaining ball process is performed. Therefore, the process number is "4". Is set (step B616). Then, this processing number is saved in the universal figure game processing number area (step B617), and the ordinary electric ball remaining processing time is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the ordinary electric solenoid output data area (step B619), and the ordinary electric operation shift setting process is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, 200 msec is saved as the wait time in step B612, 1700 msec is the normal battery opening time in step B614, and 600 msec is the normal battery remaining ball processing time in step B618. ..
Further, when the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 1", "4" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "500 msec" is acquired as the universal power release time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, since the normal battery open time is "500 msec", the normal battery (normal variation winning device 37) is opened for 500 msec, and then the control pointer during the normal drawing is "4". Therefore, the normal electric ball remaining sphere processing time of 600 msec is set.
If the universal figure stop symbol is the "hit symbol 2", "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is "1700 msec", so the normal call is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the public figure, so that the electric train opens for 1700 msec. Then, the control pointer is updated to "4" during the public figure for 600 msec. Hoden remaining ball processing time is set.
If the universal figure stop symbol is "hit symbol 3", "0" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the routine figure displaying process shown in FIG. In step B506, "1700 msec" is acquired as the universal communication opening time. Therefore, after the display time of 600 msec has passed, the normal call release time is "1700 msec", so the normal call is released for 1700 msec. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the universal communication, so that the general electric train opens for 1700 msec. Then, the control pointer is updated to "2" during the universal communication for 200 msec. Wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during normal figure, so that the electric train is opened for 1700 msec. Then, 600 msec because the control pointer during normal figure is updated to "4". The processing time for the remaining sphere of normal electric power is set.

[Disposal of remaining spheres by Dentsu]
Next, the details of the normal electric ball remaining ball process (step B12) in the above-mentioned general figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 107(a), in the normal electricity remaining sphere processing, the per-university-university-end processing shift setting processing (step B701) is performed.

[Universal figure end processing transition setting processing]
Next, the details of the per-universal-diagram end process shift setting process (step B701) in the above-mentioned normal electric remaining ball process will be described. As shown in FIG. 107(b), in the universal figure ending process transition setting process, first, the process number "5" related to the universal figure ending process is set (step B711), and the process number is assigned to the universal figure game. The data is saved in the processing number area (step B712).

After that, the universal figure ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the universal figure game processing timer area (step B713), and a signal regarding the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric auditor product 1 in-operation signal is turned off). Is saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the ordinary electric count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control unit area for hitting the universal figure is cleared (step B716), and the ending process shift setting process for the universal figure ends.

[End processing per ordinary figure]
Next, the details of the per-universal-drawing end process (step B13) in the above-described general-universal-drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 108A, in the per-universal-drawing end process, the per-universal-drawing normal process shift setting process 2 (step B801) is performed.

[Purpose normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, details of the normal/universal/universal process transition setting process 2 (step B801) in the above-described normal/universal-person end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 108(b), in the universal figure normal process shift setting process 2, first, a process number "0" relating to the regular figure normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is assigned to the universal figure game process. Save in the number area (step B812).

After that, a signal relating to the end of hit of the universal figure variation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 hit signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B813), and the fraud monitoring period of the regular variation winning device 37 is defined. The flag (the flag during the fraud monitoring period) is saved in the regular electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B814), and the general/universal process shift setting process 2 ends.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the above timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator, the special figure 2 hold indicator, the general figure hold indicator, the first game status display section, the second game status display section, and the round display provided on the collective display device 50 Settings related to the driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit are performed.

As shown in FIG. 109, in the segment LED edit processing, first, the blink control timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and it is determined whether or not the output is on timing depending on whether the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1 or not. (Step S502). In the present embodiment, when the bit 5 of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on timing, thereby creating a blinking cycle of 128 msec.
If it is the output on timing (step S502; Y), the general figure reservation number display table 1 of the general figure reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode on the general figure reservation indicator is specified is set. (Step S503), if it is not the output on-timing (Step S502; N), the universal figure reservation number display table 2 is set (Step S504).
Then, the display data corresponding to the number of reserved universal figures is acquired from the set number-of-maintenance-universals display table and saved in the segment area of the universal figure reservation indicator (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the number of reserved universal figures is any of "0" to "2", the display data is the same regardless of which of the general figure reserved number display tables is set.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output on timing (step S506), and if it is the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserved number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserved indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 reserved number display table 1 is set (step S507), and when the output is not on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 reserved number display table 2 is set ( Step S508).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number display table is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 reserved display (step S509).

After that, it is determined whether it is the output on-timing (step S510), and if it is the output on-timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 hold number display in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 reserved number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when the output is not on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 reserved number display table 2 is set (step S511). S512).
Then, the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number is acquired from the set special figure 2 reserved number display table and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 reserved indicator (step S513).
Further, a round display table that defines the display mode on the round display unit is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, when the time saving state occurs, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 that lights up and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state is defined is set (step S516), and the game state display number is set. The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game status display section (step S517). In the present embodiment, the first game state display unit consisting of one LED is turned off during normal operation and turned on during special time saving (during normal power support).
After that, the gaming state display table 2 in which the display mode on the second gaming state display section for informing that the right-handed state is more advantageous than the left-handed state is defined is set (step S518), and the game is played. The display data corresponding to the state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second game state display portion (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display section consisting of one LED is turned off during normal hitting (left hitting), and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, during a big hit, a small hit, and normal power support). ) Is configured to be lit.

[Unauthorized magnet monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

As shown in FIG. 110, in the magnet irregularity monitoring process, first, the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). It is determined whether magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602), and the timer is updated. Determines whether the time has expired (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, it is determined that the time has expired when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more.

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet irregularity notification timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. Yes (step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously on for a certain period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud that defines the magnet fraud notification time is defined. If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet irregularity notification timer is "0" (step S610). Even if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the magnet injustice notification timer is “0” (step S610; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the injustice notification period has ended or is incorrect from the beginning. If the notification has not been made, a command for ending the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud cancellation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the prepared magnet illegal flag does not match the value of the magnet illegal flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet illegal flag is saved in the magnet illegal flag area (step S614), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends.
Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” is a normal route.

[Board radio frequency monitoring process]
Next, details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 111, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I/F 121, It is determined whether the board radio sensor 62 is on, that is, in a state where an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a board radio wave irregularity notification command is prepared (step S703), a board radio wave irregularity flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step S704), and the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is set to a value in the board radio wave irregularity flag area. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, whereas in the case of board radio fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is turned on once. At that point, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the board radio sensor 62 is not turned on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio fraud notification timer that regulates the radio fraud notification time is set to "-1" unless it is "0". Update (step S705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is "0" (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave irregularity notification timer is not "0" (step S706; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio frequency irregularity monitoring process ends. In addition, when the value of the radio wave injustice notification timer is “0” (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and the injustice notification period has expired or from the beginning, it is illegal. If the notification has not been made, a command to end the board radio wave irregularity notification is prepared (step S707), and a board radio wave irregularity release flag is prepared as a board radio wave irregularity flag (step S708). It is determined whether the value matches the value in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag matches the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing ends. If the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag does not match the value of the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S709; N), the prepared board radio wave irregularity flag is saved in the board radio wave irregularity flag area (step S710), and the effect command is issued. The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave irregularity monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S701; N”→“step S705”→“step S706;Y”→“step S707”→“step S708”→“step S709;Y” is a normal route.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S105), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S113) are used as the monitoring results. Based on this, processing for creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the external information editing process, first, if the glass frame opening error is not occurring (step S801; N) and the body frame opening error is not occurring (step S802; N), , OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), OFF data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. ..
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the ON data of the door/frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

If the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not "0", it is updated by -1 ( Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set when the RAM initial value is set when the RAM is started in the main process, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809) and step S810. Process shifts to. If the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the process of step S809 is skipped and the process of step S810 is performed. Transition.

Then, when the magnet illegality is occurring (step S810; Y), when the board electric wave illegality is occurring (step S811; Y), when the frame electric wave irregularity is occurring (step S812; Y), When the illegal transmission is occurring (step S813; Y), or when the special winning opening is occurring (step S814; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( In step S816), ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

On the other hand, neither the occurrence of magnet fraud (step S810; N), the occurrence of board radio fraud (step S811; N), the occurrence of frame radio fraud (step S812; N), nor the occurrence of universal electric fraud (Step S813; N), if the special winning opening fraud is not occurring (step S814; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S815), and then step S818 is executed. Move to processing.

Then, a main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) for setting information on the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a starting port signal editing process (step S819) for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed.
Next, if the symbol fixed number control timer for controlling the output time of the information relating to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not "0", -1 is updated (step S820). The minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S821).

When the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area. Then (step S822), the external information editing process ends.
If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time has not expired, save the ON data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S823), and the external information editing process ends.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S818) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. In the main prize ball signal editing process, the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment) This is the process of outputting to the device.

As shown in FIG. 114, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is "0" (step S833).

Then, when the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is not "0" (step S833; N), the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is set in the main prize ball. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S835). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is one of the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 msec) and the OFF state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 msec) of the main prize ball signal. Of the ON state (128 msec, for example). Then, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is “0” (step S833; Y), OFF data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

In this embodiment, the game control device 100 outputs a main prize ball signal every time the planned number of payout game balls reaches 10, and the payout control device 200 sets the payout number of game balls to 10. The main prize ball signal is output every time.
Specifically, the game control device 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output count by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) and updates every 10 payout schedules (each time the payout command is transmitted). The main prize ball signal is output for the set number of outputs.
With respect to the main award ball signal output for each schedule, since the award ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 payouts are actually performed, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to deal with illegal payouts. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, even if the payout is delayed due to running out of balls, etc. and the payout is done after the big hit ends, the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning wins Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting gate signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The starting port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 115, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting port signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting port signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output frequency is "0" (step S843).

Then, when the number of times of starting port signal output is not "0" (step S843; N), the number of times of starting port signal output is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting port signal output control timer is set in the starting port signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The initial value of the starting port signal output control timer is calculated from the on-state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 msec) and the off-state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 msec) of the starting port signal. It is an on-state time (for example, 128 msec). Then, the ON data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
When the number of times the starting port signal is output is "0" (step S843; Y), OFF data for turning off the starting port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S843). (S848), the starting port signal editing process ends.

On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output ON section (step S846). The fact that the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section means that the value of the start-port signal output control timer is not "0". When the start-port signal output control timer is in the output-on section (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-port signal output control timer is not in the output-on section (step S846; N), off data for turning off the start-port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM ( (Step S848), the starting port signal editing processing ends.

Next, the effect in the game and the control by the effect control device 300 that controls this effect will be described. 116 and 117 show an example of effects in the special game state. Here, the case where the 16R certainty variation B big hit including the short opening occurs is shown.

After the big hit result mode is derived in the special figure variation display game, a fanfare production according to the kind of big hit is performed as shown in FIG. 116(a), and then the round game is started. As shown in FIG. 116(b), in the display device 41, a round number display 41a indicating the number of rounds, a symbol display 41b displaying a big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variable display game, and a right-handing instruction for instructing right-handing. The display 41c and the acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of prize balls obtained by the long opening are displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 116(c), when a game ball is won in the special variable winning device 38 in a long-opening round and wins a prize ball, the number of prize balls is displayed as the prize ball number display 41e. , Is added to the acquired game ball number display 41d. When the round ends and the interval is reached, the interval effect is performed as shown in FIG. 116(d). Since the next round is also long open, an interval effect for long open is performed here.

Further, when the round game progresses and becomes a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state can be selected, the mode transition is performed as shown in FIG. 116(e). The selection screen 41f is displayed. On the mode transition selection screen 41f, a normal mode, which is the first mode, and a delay mode, which is the second mode, can be selected, and the player operates the effect buttons 25 and the touch panel 29 to move the cursor imitating a finger. Make a choice by doing that.

Further, in a round interval effect that may be short-opened from the next time, that is, in the interval effect after the end of 4R, a round-continuous effect 41g for notifying whether or not the long-opening will continue is performed after the next time. .. In this round continuation effect 41g, as shown in FIG. 117(a), the letters "short" and "long" alternately blink, and the result is shown by the letters that finally light up. 16R Probability change B, so it has been announced that the opening will be short. Further, when it is informed that the short opening will be performed, as an interval effect, as shown in FIG. 117(b), a promotion effect 41h that urges the player to aim at the special variation winning device 38 is performed. In addition, for example, when the jackpot type is the 16R probability variation A (all long open), the character "long" is lit up in the round continuation effect 41g to notify that it is long open.

As shown in FIG. 117(c), the promotion effect 41h is continued even in the short opening round. Furthermore, the highlighting effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variation winning device 38 is open is performed. The highlighting effect 41i is displayed as if light is being emitted from the special variation winning device 38. The special variation winning device 38 includes a decoration means for performing decoration by light emission. The light emission timing, the light emission intensity, the light emission color, and the like are associated with the light emission mode by the decoration means and the display mode of the highlighting effect 41i. May or may not be synchronized.

In addition, when the round with short opening is started, in addition to the acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of award balls acquired with the long opening, the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j showing the number of award balls acquired with the short opening is displayed. Is displayed. Further, the number of rounds display 41a displays the number of remaining openings. Here, there are 12 rounds including the running round, and each round is opened once, so it is displayed as 12 more open. After that, as shown in FIG. 117(d), when the short open round ends and the interval time comes, the promotion effect 41h continues, but the emphasis effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variation winning device 38 is open is When the process is finished and the next round is started as shown in FIG. 117(e), the highlighting effect 41i is restarted.

When the final round is finished, the ending effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 117(f) and 117(g). In this ending effect, as shown in FIG. 117(f), in the acquired game ball number display 41d showing the number of award balls acquired by the long opening, the short open acquisition game ball number display 41j showing the number of the award balls acquired by the short opening. 117 is performed, and a total number display 41k for displaying the total number of prize balls acquired in the special game state is performed as shown in FIG. 117(g).

In the ending effect, a state suggestion display 41m, which is a display that suggests a probability state after the end of the special game state, is performed. The contents of this state suggestion display are different depending on the effect mode selected by the player in the mode transition selection round, and as shown in FIG. 118, depending on the probability state after the end of the special game state (1)- The character (4) is selected according to a predetermined selection rate. When the normal mode, which is the first mode, is selected as shown in FIG. 118(a), only the character (1) is selected in the high probability state, and the character (2) is selected in the low probability state. ) Character is selected. Further, when the delay mode which is the second mode is selected as shown in FIG. 118(b), the characters (1) to (4) are selected according to the probability state according to the selection rate. Has become. The probability state may be suggested not only by the character image but also by character information such as lines.

[Main processing]
In order to perform the above-described effects, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs a main process shown in FIG. 119 and a timer interrupt process (not shown). As shown in FIG. 119, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) of creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. The reading of the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process. In the effect button input process, when the input from the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed, the effect contents are changed.

Then, the hall/player setting mode process is performed for accepting operations such as the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and the change of the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) of updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, a received command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to the command from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display edit process (step C13) for performing settings for controlling the progress of the effect and editing of a drawing command. ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 ms) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, since the system cycle (one frame is 1/30 seconds) is created, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. The frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching in later than 1/60 seconds). May be switched). When it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) for controlling output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b) and a decoration control process (step for controlling LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, etc.). C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board production device 44 is performed. Then, the initial operation process for setting the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed (step C20), the effect mode management process for managing the effect mode is performed (step C21), and the process for clearing WDT (step C8). Return to.

[Reception command check processing]
FIG. 120 shows the received command check processing in the main processing described above. In the received command check processing, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception number (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and whether or not the command copying for the command reception number is completed is completed. It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer, but the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command is analyzed in the command area. Is configured. As a result, the command (data) can be moved to make a vacant space in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command. In addition, the command analysis can be collectively performed in one round of the main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207) and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the received command check processing, the commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 121 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis processing, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). When it is determined that MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

When it is determined in step C232 or step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the received command analysis processing is ended.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235). The fluctuation system command is a command for instructing a fluctuation pattern of a special figure. When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable system command (step C235; Y), the variable system command process (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of big hit commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation related to a big hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen) or a command related to small hit medium performance (display of a fanfare screen or an end screen). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; Y), the big hit type command process (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

When it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit type command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol type command (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information related to the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special symbol). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), the symbol system command process (step C240) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as the hold number command and error command. (Step C241). The single-shot command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense by combination like a pattern command and a variable command. This one-shot system command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information system command, an error/illegal system command, a model designation command and the like. When it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the single-shot system command (step C241; Y), the single-shot system command process (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol commands (step C243). When MODE is determined to be in the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

In addition, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variable system command (step C245). When it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetching variable system command (step C245; Y), the prefetching variable system command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation type command (step C245; N), the received command analysis processing ends.

The look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as the pre-reading notice or the pre-reading notice effect) means whether or not the special figure variability display game corresponding to the starting memory (holding) in which the special figure variability display game is not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance (or what kind of variation pattern) with a predetermined degree of reliability, a decorative start memory display or the like displayed on the display device 41 is performed in a manner different from the normal mode, or an effect is displayed on the display device 41. It is an effect such as displaying. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which correspond to the starting memory which becomes the target of pre-reading production, from game control control equipment 100 at the time of starting winning a prize It is transmitted to the performance control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 122 shows the single-shot command processing in the received command analysis processing described above. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether or not MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information about the model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing for rewriting the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command is performed (step C262), and single-shot command processing is performed. To finish.

Further, when it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model designation command (step C261; N), it is determined whether or not MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. The determination is made (step C263). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the single-shot system command processing is ended. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), the area required for initialization is initialized and the RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, the RAM initialization scenario data is set in order to perform an effect when the RAM initialization is performed.

If it is determined in step C263 that the MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE outputs a power failure recovery command indicating that the RAM 111C is recovered from the power failure without being initialized. It is determined whether or not they correspond (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), the area required for initialization is initialized and the recovery screen information for displaying the power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power outage recovery is set in order to perform an effect upon power outage recovery.

When it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to the power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command indicating the start of the customer waiting demo. (Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; Y), the customer waiting demo process is performed (step C268), and the single-shot system command process ends. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set to the customer waiting demonstration, and the customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform the customer waiting demonstration.

If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269). When the MODE is the special figure 1 hold (step C269; Y), the special figure 1 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative starting memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C270), the single-shot system command processing is ended. When it is determined in step C269 that the MODE does not correspond to the special figure 1 hold (step C269; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271). Then, if the MODE is the special figure 2 hold (step C271; Y), the special figure 2 hold information setting process for displaying the decorative start memory display corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. (Step C272), and the single-shot system command processing ends. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a start memory display means for performing a start memory notification display for displaying information on the start memory by a start memory display (decorative start memory display) corresponding to each start memory.

If the MODE is not the special figure 2 hold at step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether the MODE is probability information (step C273). If MODE is probability information (step C273; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C274), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If MODE is not probability information in step C273 (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is error/invalid (step C275). If the MODE is an error/illegal (step C275; Y), an error/illegal setting process is performed to perform a corresponding process such as an error notification (step C276), and the single-shot system command process is terminated.

If MODE is not an error/illegal at step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C277). If MODE is effect mode switching (step C277; Y), effect mode switching setting processing for effecting effect mode switching is performed (step C278), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

In addition, in step C277, when MODE is not the effect mode switching (step C277; N), it is determined whether MODE is a symbol stop (step C279). Then, if MODE is not a symbol stop (step C279; N), the single-shot system command processing is ended. When MODE is a symbol stop (step C279; Y), it is determined whether the command is a normal command (step C280). In the determination as to whether it is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether or not the target of the symbol stop command is the target of the special figure that is currently changing.

Then, if the command is not a normal command (step C280; N), the single-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C280; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special symbol is performed (step C281), and if all the symbols are stopped, the game state flag is set to the normal state (step C282). , Ends the single-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special figure variable display game is stopped. The game state flag is a flag indicating the current game state, and in addition to the normal state, there are flags indicating states such as changing, big hit, and small hit, and an appropriate flag is set according to the situation.

[Pre-reading pattern command processing]
In FIG. 123, the look-ahead symbol type command processing (step C244) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing is shown. In this prefetching symbol type command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301). If the latest hold information is the special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, if the received prefetching pattern command is related to the special figure 1 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 1 hold number. Save in the prefetch symbol command area in FIG. 1 (step C302), set the prefetch variable command reception waiting flag (step C304), and finish the prefetch symbol system command processing.

Further, if the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, if the received prefetching symbol type command is related to the special figure 2 hold, the command corresponds to the special figure 2 hold number. Special figure 2 it saves in the pre-reading design command area (step C303), sets the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag (step C304), ends pre-reading design system command processing. The read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 because the read-ahead symbol command and the read-ahead change command (read-ahead change pattern command) are set (pair).

[Prefetch variable system command processing]
FIG. 124 shows the look-ahead variable system command processing (step C246) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing. In this prefetching variable command processing, it is first determined whether or not the prefetching variable command is waiting to be received (step C311). Here, when there is a read-ahead variable command reception waiting flag set in the above-described read-ahead symbol system command processing, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If the pre-reading variable command reception is not waiting (step C311; N), the pre-reading variable command processing is ended. On the other hand, when the pre-reading variable command reception is waiting (step C311; Y), the pre-reading variable command reception waiting flag is cleared (step C312).

After that, in the processes of steps C313 to C316, a process of converting the look-ahead change command (look-ahead change pattern command) received from the game control device 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control device 300 is performed. First, a process (step C313) of setting the look-ahead variable MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of symbols held in the latest hold information is performed, and the special-drawing-type information of the start-up memory corresponding to the read-ahead variable system command received this time and A MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the current number of reserved special types.

Next, by referring to the set MODE conversion table, the sub prefetch change command MODE corresponding to the MODE of the prefetch change command is acquired (step C314). Further, the look-ahead variable ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and the in-sub-lookahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the look-ahead variable command is acquired (step C316).

The MODE includes information on the first-half fluctuation, but the content and time of the first-half fluctuation set based on this MODE changes depending on the number of holdings at the time of judgment. The judgment result may be different depending on the time judgment. Therefore, in order to make it possible to easily and surely perform the process of the pre-reading notice effect without being affected by the hold number at the time of determination, the MODE is converted in the conversion mode according to the current hold number, and It is designed so that they can be handled commonly regardless of the number of holds. For example, without reach, it may be a short fluctuation in the first half fluctuation time depending on the holding status, and without reach, it may be a long fluctuation in the first half regardless of the holding status. The look-ahead notice effect is converted into a MODE classified according to the matters to be considered, so that the look-ahead notice effect can be processed easily and surely.

Further, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuations such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, even in the normal reach, for example, the final stop symbol is set such that the final stop symbol is one frame before the reach symbol, the other symbol is one frame before the symbol, and the hit symbol is set. Since there is an ACT corresponding to each of these, the range of values is wide. Therefore, by converting the ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system into the same ACTs, the number is reduced and the processing load such as checking in the processing of the prefetching notice production is reduced.

Next, it is determined whether the converted MODE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not 0 (step C317; N), the prefetch variable system command processing is terminated because the command value is abnormal. On the other hand, if both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the command after conversion is saved in the prefetching variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and the pending number (step C318), and MODE is set. A prefetch command matching check process (step C319) is performed to determine whether the combination of ACT and ACT (command combination) is normal.

As a result of the prefetch command consistency check process (step C319), if the command combination is not normal (step C320; N), the prefetch variable system command process ends. On the other hand, when the command combination is normal (step C320; Y), prefetch lottery processing (step C321) for randomly selecting the execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the prefetch notice effect is generated (step C322).

Then, when the prefetching notice effect is not generated (step C322; N), the prefetching variable system command processing is ended. On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C322; Y), is the occurring prefetching notice effect (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C321)) immediately started? Is determined (step C323). The effect to be started immediately is, for example, a notice of pending change for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the effect that does not start immediately is a look-ahead notice effect that is performed during execution of the special figure variation display game, and an effect that continuously generates a specific effect or reach state over a plurality of special figure variation display games, or a variation. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a notice of a pending change for changing the display mode of the decoration start memory display at a timing later than the present time, and the like. As for the timing of starting the execution of the effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure variation display game is being executed, the special figure variation display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure variation display game starts. The timing to be performed is applicable.

If the effect does not start immediately (step C323; N), the prefetching variable system command processing ends. In this case, the advance notice is set at the time of starting the special figure variation display game that executes the prefetch advance notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C323; Y), the display corresponding to the selected look-ahead notice effect is set (step C324), and the look-ahead variable system command processing ends.

[Design command processing]
FIG. 125 shows the symbol-based command processing (step C240) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this symbol-based command processing, first, the special symbol type corresponding to MODE (either special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is set (step C351), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and finish the symbol-based command processing.

The symbol type is a category of symbols such as outlying symbols, 16R probability variation A big hit symbol, 16R probability variation B jackpot symbol, 16R normal A jackpot symbol, 16R normal B jackpot symbol, 4R probability variation jackpot symbol, small hit symbol, etc. It is associated with data. Since the ratio of symbols changes between special figure 1 and special figure 2 (probability rate is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and there are multiple symbol type setting tables corresponding to MODE data. Is selected, and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable command processing]
FIG. 126 shows the variable system command processing (step C236) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this variable system command processing, it is first determined whether the special figure classification is undetermined (step C361). The special figure type is information indicating whether the type of the special figure is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2, and is the information set in step C251 of the symbol system command processing described above.

If the special figure type is not determined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variable command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variable command and the symbol type are It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

If the variable command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variable command processing ends. When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). The symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, outlying symbols, 16R probability variation A jackpot symbols, 16R probability variation B jackpot symbols, 16R normal A jackpot symbols, 16R normal B jackpot symbols, 4R probability variation jackpot symbols, small. There are hit patterns. When the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent, the production is performed as if the variation command (variation pattern command) out of sync is received, but the symbol command of the 16R probability variation A jackpot symbol is received. It means a combination that is inconsistent above (combination of variable command and symbol type).

In the process of determining the variation pattern type from the variation command (step C364), the variation pattern type, which is a rough classification of the variation display effect of the special figure, is determined according to the received command. Then, a variation effect setting process for setting information for performing an effect according to the variation command is performed (step C365).

Next, the special figure changing state is set as the P machine state (state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, the state of changing the special map indicates that the special map is changing (not during a customer waiting demonstration, a big hit, or a fanfare). Further, if the number of pre-reading effects (the number of pre-reading executions) is not zero, the number of pre-reading effects is updated by -1 (a process of reducing the number of pre-reading effects by 1) (step C367), and the variable system command process is ended.

[Variation effect setting process]
FIG. 127 shows the variation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-described variation system command process. In this variation effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is variation without reach (step C381). When the variation pattern type is the reachless variation (step C381; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code and the special figure type and the presentation mode at that time is set (step C382). In addition, since there is no reach variation, the symbol type is always an outlier symbol, and it is not necessary to specifically refer to the symbol type here. The effect mode corresponds to the game mode managed by the effect control device 300 and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a low accuracy mode, a probability variation mode, a time saving mode, a latent mode, and the like. Furthermore, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution ratio of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 are different in each mode.

Next, by referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of MODE and special figure types to be reserved is acquired (step C383). Accordingly, in the case of a reach-less variation, it is possible to change the lottery content of the notice effect that appears during each variation (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) according to the number of reserves. After that, the first-half notice distribution group table is used to perform the lottery for the notice that appears during the first-half change (step C386).

On the other hand, when the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, referring to the first-half notice distribution group address table, the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE and the variation pattern type is acquired (step C385), and the first-half notice distribution group table is used to change the first-half notice. The preliminary announcement lottery that appears in (Step C386).

Next, the notice production of the latter half fluctuation is drawn. The latter half of the special figure variation display game is a so-called reach action (for example, variation display in a special result mode (special symbol combination) in which the display area excluding a specific area among the display areas of a plurality of columns of the special figure becomes a big hit. Is stopped and is variably displayed only in a specific area). On the other hand, the first half variation of the special figure variation display game is a variation display before the start of the reach action.

First, the second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special figure type, the effect mode, and the symbol type is set (step C387). The latter half notice distribution group address table is a table for selecting an address of the latter half notice distribution group table. Then, the address of the latter-half notice distribution group table corresponding to ACT is acquired by referring to the latter-half notice distribution group address table (step C388), and the second-half notice distribution group table is used to change the latter half (during reach). A preliminary announcement lottery is conducted (step C389).

After that, the content of the variable effect corresponding to MODE and ACT is determined (step C390), and the content of the effect corresponding to the notice lottery result is determined (step C391). As a result, an effect such as a variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game and main reach contents and a notice are decided. Further, the stop symbol setting process for determining the stop symbol is performed by also referring to the determined variation pattern (reach effect, etc.) of the special figure variation display game and the notice content (step C392).

Next, an operation substitution process is performed to set another movable effect member to operate instead of the movable effect member that has a malfunction in the initial operation (step C393). Details of the operation substitution process will be described later. Then, the display setting of the variable effect is set (step C394), and the display setting of the notice effect is set (step C395). By these processes, the effect and advance notice in the decorative special figure variable display game set as described above can be executed. Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special map type is performed (step C396). In this process, the setting of reducing the decoration special figure starting memory display is made corresponding to the decrease of the starting memory corresponding to the start of the special figure changing display game.

Then, a sound number, which is a BGM number, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C397), and the decoration special figure variation (variation display of identification information) corresponding to the special figure type is set. Display settings are made (step C398). Further, in the information display device 630, in order to set the variable display of the fourth symbol that displays the decorative special figure variable display game separately from the variable display of the identification information, the display setting of the fourth symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type Is performed (step C399), and the variation effect setting process ends.

[Big hit type command processing]
FIG. 128 shows the big hit system command processing (step C238) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this big hit system command processing, it is first determined whether MODE is fanfare (step C401). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the design information (stop design number or stop design pattern). If MODE is fanfare (step C401; Y), fanfare production setting processing for setting a fanfare display image according to the type of big hit or small hit is performed (step C402), and the P machine state is set to fanfare. After setting (step C403), the big hit system command processing ends.

If MODE is not a fanfare (step C401; N), it is determined whether MODE is a round (step C404). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state. If MODE is a round (step C404; Y), round effect setting processing for updating the number-of-rounds display information and the like is performed (step C405), and the P-machine state is set to "in-round" (step C406). The big hit command processing ends.

If MODE is not a round (step C404; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (step C407). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. If MODE is an interval (step C407; Y), an interval effect setting process for setting effects during the interval is performed (step C408), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C409), and the jackpot is hit. Terminates command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C407; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C410). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command regarding the ending after the end of the final round.

If MODE is the ending (step C410; Y), for example, when the high probability state is reached after the special game state is over, the big hit end, such as setting screen information for notifying that the high probability state is reached An ending effect setting process for setting screen information corresponding to the subsequent game state is performed (step C411), the P machine state is set to ending (step C412), and the big hit system command process is ended. If MODE is not the ending (step C410; N), it is determined whether MODE is a count (step C413). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening count command based on a winning of the special variation winning device 38.

When MODE is not a count (step C413; N), the big hit system command processing is ended. When MODE is a count (step C413; Y), a count effect setting process (step C414) for setting an effect corresponding to the winning of the special variation winning device 38 is performed, and the big hit system command process is ended.

[Count effect setting process]
FIG. 129 shows the count effect setting process (step C414) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this fanfare production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is a short open round in which the openable time is a predetermined time or less (step C421). In the present embodiment, the openable time is 0.2 seconds in the short open round, and the openable time is 29 seconds in the long open round.

If it is not a short opening round (step C421; N), that is, if it is a long opening round, the acquired game ball counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C422), and the acquired game ball counter is set. The display setting of the obtained game ball number display 41d is performed (step C423), and the count effect setting process ends. The winning game ball number counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variation winning device 38 in the long open round, and in step C422, the update is performed to add the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning. The updated value is displayed in step C423.

In the case of a short opening round (step C421; Y), the short opening pattern counter is updated based on the special winning opening count command (step C424), and the short opening acquisition game ball based on the short opening pattern counter. The display setting of the number display 41j is performed (step C425), and the count effect setting process ends. The short opening pattern counter counts the number of prize balls paid out by winning the special variable winning device 38 in the short opening round. In step C424, the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning is added and updated. The updated value is displayed in step C425.

As a result, the number of winnings to the special variation winning device 38 in the long opening and the number of winnings to the special variation winning device 38 in the short opening are separately counted and displayed. That is, the effect control device 300 is a winning determination unit that determines whether the prize to the special variation winning device 38 is in the first opening mode (long opening) or the second opening mode (short opening). Eggplant Further, the effect control device 300 determines the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode (long opening) and the second opening mode (short opening) based on the winning determination by the winning determination means. It constitutes a counting means for separately counting the number of prize balls based on the winning in the special variation winning device 38 in FIG.

[Fanfare production setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the fanfare production setting process (step C402) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In the fanfare production setting process, first, it is determined whether the ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command is a fanfare command corresponding to 16R probability variation A, 16R probability variation B, 16R normal A or 16R normal B.

When ACT is a big hit fanfare (step C431; Y), the big hit count is updated by +1 (step C432), and the display content of the big hit fanfare effect is determined based on the probability state and the big hit count (step C433). The number of big hits is cleared to 0 based on the normal game state which is neither the high probability state nor the time saving state. That is, the so-called consecutive chan count is counted. Then, the display setting of the fanfare effect corresponding to the determined content is set (step C434), and it is determined whether the big hit includes short opening (step C435). When the short opening is not included (step C434; N), that is, when all the rounds are long opening, the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare production setting process ends. When the short opening is included (step C434; Y), the short opening big hit information is set (step C436), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. ..

When ACT is not a big hit fanfare (step C431; N), it is determined whether ACT is a sudden fanfare (step C437). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to the 4R probability variation (probability). If the ACT is an abrupt fanfare (step C437; Y), it is determined whether or not the hit is from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C438).

When it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C438; N), the display setting of the affirmative exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state is performed (step C439), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). The setting process ends. The sudden exclusive effect corresponding to the probability state becomes the high probability state after the special game state when the 4R probability change occurs in the low probability state, and therefore the effect is informed or suggested. If the 4R probability changes in the high-probability state, the high-probability state continues even after the special game state, so an effect is given or suggested.

If the hit is from the continuous effect (step C438; Y), the affirmative effect to be executed is selected from among the affirmative effect patterns related to the currently changing effect (continuous effect) (step C440) and determined. The display setting for the sudden effect is performed (step C441), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process is ended. That is, in the case of the 4R probability change from the continuous effect, the effect related to the continuous effect is performed even in the special game state. Even in the case of the 4R probability change, the number of jackpots may be updated by +1.

If the ACT is not a sudden fanfare (step C437; N), it is determined whether the ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442). That is, it is determined whether the fanfare command corresponds to a small hit. If ACT is not a small hit fanfare (step C442; N), the fanfare effect setting process ends. When ACT is a small hit fanfare (step C442; Y), it is determined whether the hit is from a continuous effect which is an effect continuously executed over a plurality of special figure variation display games (step C443). ).

When it is not a hit from the continuous effect (step C443; N), the display setting of the small hit special effect corresponding to the probability state is set (step C444), and the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447). The production setting process ends. In the case of a small hit, there is no change in the probability state before and after the small hit. Therefore, in the small hit special effect corresponding to the probability state, an effect that informs or suggests that the probability state when the small hit occurs is maintained is performed.

If it is a win from the continuous effect (step C442; Y), a small hit effect to be executed is selected from the small hit effect patterns related to the currently changing effect (continuous effect) (step C445). The determined small hit effect display is set (step C446), the hit type information is set based on the fanfare command (step C447), and the fanfare effect setting process ends. That is, in the case of a small hit from the continuous effect, the effect related to the continuous effect is performed even in the special game state.

In the case of 4R probability change or small hit from continuous production, when the 4R probability change or small hit is derived (at the end of the special figure variation display game that becomes a sudden hit or a small hit), the 4R An effect indicating which is the special game state based on the probability change or the small hit is performed. For example, the production in which the enemy character and the teammate character fight is performed as continuous production, and the battle is not yet settled when the result mode is derived. Then, in the special game state, in the case of the 4R probability variation, an effect (a hit effect) in which the ally character wins is performed, and in the case of a small hit, an effect in which the enemy character wins (a small hit effect) is performed.

[Round effect setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the round effect setting process (step C405) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this round effect setting process, first, a right hit instruction display setting is performed (step C461), and it is determined whether or not it is a special game state based on a small hit or a bump (4R probability change) (step C462).

When it is a special game state based on a small hit or a collision (step C462; Y), display setting of a small hit/a collision round effect is performed (step C474), and the process proceeds to step C475. If the special game state is not based on the small hit or abrupt probability (step C462; N), the number of rounds is derived from the round command (step C463), and the short open big hit information is set for the big hit including the short open round. It is determined whether there is any (step C464).

If there is no short open big hit information (step C464; N), that is, if it is a special game state only for long open rounds, display setting of the number of rounds is performed (step C465), and display setting of round effect of long open pattern. Is performed (step C466). Next, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the long open pattern, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, are set (step C467).

After that, it is determined whether or not it is a mode transition selection round in which the notification mode at the end of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state can be selected (step C468). When it is not the mode transition selection round (step C468; N), the round effect setting process ends. In the case of the mode transition selection round (step C468; Y), display setting of the mode transition selection screen is performed (step C469), and the round effect setting process ends.

On the other hand, if there is short-open big hit information (step C464; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds is a predetermined value for the short open round (step C470). ). If the number of rounds is not the predetermined value for the short open round (step C470; N), that is, if the round is the long open round, the process proceeds to step C465.

If the number of rounds is a predetermined value that is a short open round (step C470; Y), that is, if it is a short open round, the display setting of the round effect of the short open pattern is made (step C471), and the round is displayed. The number of remaining releases is calculated from the number upper limit value information and the number of rounds (step C472). Then, the display setting of the remaining number of times of opening, which is the number of times of short-opening, is performed (step C473), and the display setting of the emphasis effect for urging the player to win the special variation winning device 38 is performed (step C475). After that, a sound number, which is a BGM number based on the emphasis effect, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp, are set (step C476), and the round effect setting process ends.

That is, in a short opening round, a small opening small hit or a 4R probability variation round, an effect different from the long opening round is performed. As described above, the special variation winning device 38 makes it easy for the game balls to stay in the opening/closing member 990, and it is possible to aim for a prize even with a short opening. Therefore, the player is encouraged to aim for a prize. Produce 41i.

[Interval effect setting process]
FIG. 132 shows the interval effect setting process (step C408) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this interval effect setting process, first, a sound number, which is the BGM number of the long opening interval, and a decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like, are set (step C481), and a big hit including a short opening round is performed. In the case of, it is determined whether there is short open big hit information (step C482).

If there is no short-open big hit information (step C482; N), that is, if it is in the special game state of only the long-open round, the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, the long open interval as shown in FIG. 116(d) is set. Also, if there is short open big hit information (step C482; Y), that is, if it is a special game state including a short open round, it is determined whether the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483). The predetermined value here is the number of the last rounds that will be opened long, and is 4 in this embodiment.

When the number of rounds is a predetermined value (step C483; Y), that is, when the round is to be opened shortly next time, the display setting of the round continuation notification effect is set (step C484), and the BGM based on the round continuation notification effect is performed. The tone number which is the number of No., the decoration number which is the number indicating the type of effect by the decoration lamp, etc. are set (step C485), and the interval effect setting process is ended. As a result, the round continuation notification effect as shown in FIGS. 117(a) and 117(b) is set.

On the other hand, when the number of rounds is not the predetermined value (step C483; N), it is determined whether the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486). When the number of rounds is not larger than the predetermined value (step C486; N), the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, it is a case where the round will be opened long next time, and the long opening interval remains set.

When the number of rounds is larger than the predetermined value (step C486; Y), the display setting of the short opening interval is set (step C487), and the sound number, which is the BGM number of the short opening interval, and the decorative lamp are used. A decoration number, which is a number indicating the type of effect, is set (step C488), and the interval effect setting process ends. In this case, the short opening interval as shown in FIG. 117(d) is set. In the short opening interval, the promotion effect 41h is performed, but the emphasis effect 41i is not performed. However, the highlighting effect 41i may be performed in the same manner as during the round, or the interval-specific highlighting effect may be performed.

[Ending effect setting process]
FIG. 133 shows the ending effect setting process (step C411) in the above-mentioned big hit system command process. In this ending effect setting process, first, the big hit type information, which is the kind of big hit type information that triggered the occurrence of the special game state this time, is loaded (step C491), and the big hit type information and the selection rate in the first mode ( 118(a)) is set (step C492).

Next, it is determined whether there is a mode shift flag (step C493). There are a first mode and a second mode in the effect mode after the end of the special game state, which can be selected by the player. The first mode and the second mode are effect modes in which the contents of the status indication display 41m, which is an indication of the probability state, and the effect of the special figure variation display game are different. This effect mode can be selected on the mode change selection screen 41f displayed in the mode change selection round, and the player operates the effect buttons 25 and the touch panel 29 to make a selection. Then, when the player selects the first mode, the mode shift flag is not set, and when the player selects the second mode, the mode shift flag is set.

When there is no mode shift flag (step C493; N), that is, when the first mode is set, the process shifts to step C495. In this case, the state suggestion display set in step C492 is displayed. If there is a mode transition flag (step C493; Y), that is, if the second mode is set, the state suggestion display based on the selection rate in the second mode (see FIG. 118(b)) is set ( Then, the process proceeds to step C494) and step C495.

After that, the total number of acquired game balls is calculated from the number of acquired game balls counter and the counter for the short opening pattern (step C495), and the display setting of the added effect based on the total number of acquired game balls is set (step C496). Then, the acquired game ball number counter and the short opening pattern counter are reset (step C497), the short opening jackpot information is reset (step C498), and the ending effect setting process is ended. Through the above processing, the state suggestion display 41m according to the effect mode selected by the player is performed at the end of the special game state, and the number of game balls acquired in the special game state is displayed as the total number display 41k. ..

FIG. 134 shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIGS. 134(a) to (c), the right-handing instruction display 41c for instructing right-handing may be displayed so as to flow from left to right on the display screen. In this case, the right hitting instruction display 41c is displayed in a flowing manner at a position where it does not overlap with the symbol display 41b displaying the big hit symbol derived in the decorative special figure variable display game. Further, the right-handing instruction display 41c may be displayed so as to flow at a position overlapping the symbol display 41b, but the back side of the symbol display 41b is displayed so that the right-handing instruction display 41c flows, and the symbol display 41b is always visible. It will be in a state. The display other than the symbol display 41b, such as the number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds and the highlighting effect 41i, may or may not be hidden by the right-handing instruction display 41c.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 134(d) to (f), a promotion effect 41h that urges the player to aim at the special variation winning device 38 may be displayed so as to flow toward the special variation winning device 38. In this case, when it overlaps with the symbol display 41b that displays the jackpot symbol derived in the decorative special figure variable display game, the promotion effect 41h is displayed behind the symbol display 41b as shown in FIG. 134(d). However, the symbol display 41b is always visible. Further, the promotion effect 41h may be displayed so as to flow at a position not overlapping the symbol display 41b. It should be noted that the display other than the symbol display 41b, such as the number-of-rounds display 41a indicating the number of rounds, the highlighting effect 41i, and the short open winning game ball number display 41j, may or may not be hidden by the promotion effect 41h. Is also good. In addition, the display for operating the right-handing instruction display 41c as shown in FIGS. 134(a) to (c) and the display for operating the promotion effect 41h as shown in FIGS. 134(d) to (f) are simultaneously performed. May be.

FIG. 135 also shows a modification of the effect in the special game state. As shown in FIG. 135(a), the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning prize are used as a promotion effect 41h for urging the special variation winning device 38 to aim and an emphasis effect 41i that emphasizes that the special variation winning device 38 is open. An image of the device 38 may be used to instruct the operation unit 24 to be turned largely to the right or to aim at the special variation winning device 38. This makes it easier for the player to understand. In particular, when a plurality of special variation winning devices 38 are provided, it is possible to clearly specify which special variation winning device 38 should be aimed. Further, the light emitting mode of the actual special variable winning device 38 located on the lower right of the display device 41 and the light emitting mode of the image of the special variable winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 are synchronized, and at first glance The special variation winning device 38 to be aimed at is known. Of course, the light emitting mode of the operation unit 24 may be similarly synchronized.

The image may be a schematic animation or a moving image of the actual special variation winning device 38. Further, in the images of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41, it is possible to perform the display in synchronization with the light emission effect on the actual operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38, but it is not necessary. good. The images of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38 displayed on the display device 41 may be still images.

Further, as for the character information and the image of the arrow included in the right-handing instruction display 41c and the promotion effect 41h, the fluent display may be performed as described above. In this case, the front side of the image of the operation unit 24 or the special variation winning device 38 may be moved, or the rear side of the image may be moved. In addition, when the collective display device 50 is displayed on the images of the operation unit 24 and the special variation winning device 38, the display may be performed in synchronization with the actual display mode of the collective display device 50, or as a non-synchronized display. Is also good. When the display mode is not synchronized, any display mode may be used, but, for example, a state in which all the lights are turned on or off, or a specific lighting mode (in the case of 7 segments, a big hit such as “7”) is associated. A specific number is lit, and in the case of a set of LEDs, it is associated with a big hit as a unique lighting mode when a big hit occurs.

Further, when the game state of right-handedness is started, an image may be displayed to instruct the operation unit 24 to be turned largely to the right or to aim at the normal variation winning device 37. .. Further, when the left-handed gaming state is started, an image for instructing to turn the operation unit 24 to the right by a small amount or instructing to aim at the winning device 90 may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 135(b), a remaining time display 41n for displaying the remaining time until the end of the final round may be performed. The end condition of the round that is satisfied in the case of a short opening is almost the case where the openable time elapses rather than the predetermined number of game balls winning the special variation winning device 38, and the round ends in a certain time. To do. Therefore, when the subsequent rounds are shortly opened, the remaining time until the end of the final round can be calculated by integrating the time of the round until the end of the final round and the time of the interval. By displaying the remaining time in this way, it is possible to give an impression different from the case where the number of remaining rounds is notified, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. That is, it is possible to provide the remaining time calculated by the remaining time calculation means (game control device 100 or effect control device 300) for calculating the remaining time until the end of the special game state. Become.

In the above-described embodiment, the first open mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or longer, and the second open mode is continuously opened for a predetermined time or less. Although it has been described as a short opening, the opening is not limited to this, and any opening may be used as long as the first opening and the second opening are different. Further, as the gaming machine, the gaming machine that executes the variable display game based on the winning in the starting area has been described, but other gaming machines may be used. For example, it is possible to win a prize in the auxiliary gaming device based on a prize in the starting area, and a so-called feather object that generates a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball winning the auxiliary gaming device flows into a specific area. A game machine of (old 2 types) may be used.

From the above, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is provided, and the start area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening) provided in the game area 32. 97) A variation display game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information are variably displayed based on the winning of a game ball to 97), and a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when the result of the variation display game is a special result. In the machine 10, the game ball can be converted into a closed state in which the prize cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be prized, and the special variation winning device 38 that is converted into the open state in the special game state and the effect related to the game are controlled. With the production control means (production control device 300), the operation mode of the special variation winning device 38 in the special gaming state is the first opening mode (long opening) and the second opening mode different from the first opening mode. There is a mode (short opening), and the effect control means can execute a promotion effect 41h that prompts the launch of a game ball toward the special variation winning device 38 when the second opening mode is executed. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease of the game balls during the special game state and enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, the player operates the shooting operation unit (operation unit 24) for adjusting the launching force of the game ball, the display device 41 capable of displaying information regarding the game, and the special variation winning device 38 decorated with light. The decoration control means is provided, and the effect control means, as the promotion effect 41h, displays the operation method of the firing operation unit necessary for setting the firing force for firing the game ball toward the special variation winning device 38, and The display device 41 displays the decoration mode of the special variation winning device 38 by the decoration means. Therefore, the player can easily understand the contents of the promotion effect 41h.

In addition, the game board 30 having the game area 32 in which the game balls can flow down is provided, and to the starting area (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97) provided in the gaming area 32. In a gaming machine 10 that executes a variable display game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information based on the winning of the game ball, and generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result. , A special variation winning device 38 that can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win and an open state in which the game ball can win, and is converted into an open state in the special game state, and a special variation winning device in the special game state The operation modes of 38 include a first opening mode (long opening) and a second opening mode (short opening) different from the first opening mode, and the winning of the special variation winning device 38 is the first. The game includes a winning determination unit (production control device 300) that determines whether the winning is in the open mode or the second open mode. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the winning determination means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, it is configured to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38, and based on the determination of the winning by the winning determination means, based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode. The counting means (production control device 300) is provided for separately counting the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the effect and progress of the game can be controlled based on the information by the counting means, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Moreover, the production control means (production control device 300) for controlling the production related to the game is provided, and the production control means is based on the counting result by the counting means, and is a prize ball based on the winning of the special variation winning device 38 in the first opening mode. It is possible to separately notify the number and the number of prize balls based on the winning in the special variation winning device 38 in the second opening mode. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify only a part of the counting result by the counting means and then notify the counting result which has not been notified at a predetermined timing. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the initial operation of the movable effect device when the power of the game machine is turned on will be described. The initial operation is for confirming the operation of the board effect device 44 that is a movable effect device, and the content of the initial operation is set according to the state of the detection sensor before the start of the initial operation. ..

[Initial operation processing]
FIG. 136 shows the initial operation process (step C20) in the above-mentioned main process (see FIG. 119). In this initial operation processing, it is first determined whether or not there is an initial operation flag (step C101). The initial operation flag is set in a process (step C7) of saving the initial value at the time of power-on in the area to be initialized, which is performed by the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine. That is, it is a flag that is set when the power is turned on.

If this initial operation flag does not exist (step C101; N), the process moves to step C108. If there is an initial operation flag (step C101; Y), the initial operation flag is cleared (step C102) and the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C103). Then, it is determined whether all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104). The normal detection state is the detection state of the detection sensor when the movable rendering device is in the initial position, and the normal detection state is when all the movable rendering devices are in the initial position when the power is turned on. It is a state where there is no abnormality in the state of the movable production device.

When all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C104; Y), the initial operation table for performing only the normal initial operation is set (step C105), and the initial operation in-execution flag is set (step C107). When all the states of the detection sensors are not the normal detection state (step C104; N), the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation according to the detection state is set (step C106), and the initial operation execution flag is set. (Step C107). The initial operation table is a table in which the execution contents of the initial operation are defined, and the initial operation is executed according to the contents of this table.

After that, it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation executing flag (step C108), and when there is no initial operation executing flag (step C108; N), the initial operation processing ends. If there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C108; Y), that is, if the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether an abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109). When no abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109; N), it is determined whether all the initial operations are completed (step C113). If an abnormality is found in the initial operation being executed (step C109; Y), a malfunction error flag corresponding to the movable effect device in which the abnormality is detected is set (step C110), and the movable effect device of the concerned movable effect device is set. It is determined whether or not there is an alternative initial operation which is an initial operation performed in place of the initial operation (step C111).

If there is no alternative initial operation (step C111), the process proceeds to step C113. If there is an alternative initial operation (step C111), the alternative initial operation is set (step C112), and the process proceeds to step C113. Then, when all the initial operations are not completed (step C113; N), the initial operation processing ends. When all the initial operations are completed (step C113; Y), the initial operation in-execution flag is cleared (step C114), and the initial operation processing ends.

As described above, the detection sensor for detecting the operation state is provided corresponding to each movable effect device, and the detection state (normal detection state) in the state where each is in the initial position is as shown in FIG. 137. is there. If all the detection sensors are in the normal detection state shown in FIG. 137 before the start of the initial operation, the initial operation table shown in FIG. 140(a) for performing only the normal initial operation is set, and the initial operation is performed according to the initial operation table. Will be seen.

In this initial operation, the normal initial operation for returning the movable effect device from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position is performed for each initial operation group shown in FIG. 137. Priorities are set to the respective initial operation groups, and the initial operation is performed from the group A having the highest priority, and when the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the group B having the next priority is performed. Similarly, the initial operation of group C is performed after the initial operation of group B is completed. Then, when the initial operation of the group C is completed, the initial operation ends.

Specifically, first, as the initial operation of the group A, the initial operation of the central movable accessory unit 880 is performed. In this initial operation, the state in which each central movable member is in the initial position (see FIG. 13) is changed to the state in which each central movable member has moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 14), and then the state in the initial position (see FIG. 13). Perform the operation to return to (See). After the initial operation of the group A is completed, the initial operation of the upper movable accessory unit 800 is performed as the initial operation of the group B. In this initial operation, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 860 are in the initial position (see FIG. 9), and the movable member unit 820 is moved down to the operation completion position. In addition, the first upper movable member 848 is operated (see FIG. 11). After that, the operation of returning to the state (see FIG. 9) in the initial position is performed.

After the initial operation of the group B is completed, as the initial operation of the group C, the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730 is performed. In this initial operation, the state in which the second lower movable member 770 is in the initial position (see FIG. 7A) to the state in which the second lower movable member 770 has been moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 7B) is set. After that, the operation of returning to the state of the initial position (see FIG. 7A) is performed. Furthermore, the state in which the first lower movable members 740, 741 are in the initial position (see FIG. 6A) and the first lower movable members 740, 741 have been moved to the operation completion position (see FIG. 6B). Then, the operation of returning to the initial position (see FIG. 6A) is performed. When the initial operation of this group C is completed, the normal initial operation is completed.

The operation of the movable effect device included in the group B includes vertical movement of the movable member unit 820, rotational movement of the first upper movable member 848, and swing movement of the second upper movable member 860, both of which are games. However, in the normal initial operation of group B, the swinging operation of the second upper movable member 860 is not performed. The rotating operation of the first upper movable member 848 is an operation indicating that the player has higher expectations than the swinging operation of the second upper movable member 860, and is an operation that is executed less frequently. In the normal initial operation, it is confirmed whether or not the operation executed in the scene where the player's expectation is the highest can be executed so that the interest of the game is not spoiled in the scene.

The normal initial operation described above is performed in order from the group including the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large. That is, the area where the initial operation of the group A shown in FIG. 138(a) overlaps the display device 41 is the largest, and the area where the initial operation of group B shown in FIG. 138(b) overlaps the display device 41 is the largest. The initial operation of the group C shown in (c) and (d) has the smallest area overlapping the display device 41.

In addition, in the initial operation of the group C, the display device is selected from the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 shown in FIG. 138(d) and the initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 shown in FIG. 138(c). The initial operation of the second lower movable member 770 having a large overlapping area with 41 is performed first. By performing the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large first, when the display of the display device 41 is started after a lapse of a certain time after the power is turned on, the display content is not visible by the movable effect device. Can be prevented.

Performing the initial operation in this order is particularly effective when a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure variation display game. FIG. 139 shows an example in which a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure variation display game. In this example, first, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are executed, and the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139(b) is displayed on the display device. Since the variable display is being performed here, the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 and the second decorative game display section 88 are in the variable display state.

When a power outage occurs while the special figure variation display game is being executed (t11), the game control device 100 interrupts the special figure variation display game being executed and performs backup processing to determine the state when the power outage occurs. Processing for holding is performed. Further, since the effect control device 300 does not have a backup function, the information of the decorative special figure variation display game being executed is lost. Further, the display device 41 is not displayed during the power failure.

After that, when the power is restored (t12), the game control device 100 performs a process for restarting the game from the state at the time of the power outage based on the backed up information. Then, when the power is restored normally based on the backed up data, the power recovery command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the suspended special figure variation display game is restarted (t13).

The effect control device 300 displays the initial screen shown in FIG. 139 on the display device 41 in response to the power failure recovery (t12). In addition, the initial operation of the movable production device is started when the power is restored. Then, since it can be understood that the power failure is recovered based on the reception of the power failure recovery command, the power failure recovery screen indicating that is displayed in FIG. 139(d) (t13).

When the variation time of the special figure variation display game ends, the game control device 100 transmits a symbol stop command to the effect control device 300. In the effect control device 300, since the information on the decorative special figure variation display game cannot be restarted because the information of the decorative special figure variation display game is lost due to the power failure, the power failure is restored on the display device 41 even while the special figure variation display game is running. The screen display continues. Since the end of the special figure variation display game can be grasped with the reception of the symbol stop command, the display of the screen during the game as shown in FIG. 139(b) is started and the result is displayed (t14). As a result, the display is returned to the state where the game is normally played. When the stop time for displaying the result has elapsed, a new special figure variation display game is started (t16).

When the remaining time of the variation time of the restarted special figure variation display game is short, the initial operation may end (t15) after the result display timing (t14) as in this example. A movable effect device may exist in front of the display device 41. However, by performing the initial operation in order from the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large, when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed, the area in which the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device is reduced as much as possible. It is possible to prevent the visual confirmation of the result. Further, the importance of the information displayed in the power failure recovery is the lowest in the information displayed in the initial screen shown in FIG. 139(c), and then the information of the power failure recovery screen shown in FIG. 139(d). Is highly important, and the result information on the in-game screen shown in FIG. 139(b) is most important. Therefore, the visibility of more important information can be improved by sequentially performing the initial operation from the operation in which the area overlapping the display device 41 is large.

Further, from the viewpoint of enhancing the visibility of the result of the restarted special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure variation display which is the display area of the decoration special figure variation display game located in the approximate center of the display area of the display device 41. You may make it perform an initial operation|movement in order from an operation|movement with a large area which overlaps with the game display part 85. Here, since the initial operation of the group B shown in FIG. 138(b) has the largest area overlapping the decorative special figure variation display game display portion 85, the priority order of the initial operation is set to the highest. Hereinafter, since the area overlapping with the decorative special figure variation display game display portion 85 becomes smaller in the order of the group C shown in FIGS. 138(c) and (d) and the group A shown in FIG. 138(a), the initial operation is performed in this order. Set so that the priority of is low. Accordingly, when the result of the special figure variation display game is displayed, the area in which the display device 41 is hidden by the movable effect device can be made as small as possible, and the visual confirmation of the result can be prevented.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a predetermined effect Movable rendering device that performs an operation (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first center movable movable member 900, The second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930), a display device 41 capable of displaying an image relating to a game, and an effect control device for controlling the movable effect device and the display device. (Production control device 300), the production control means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable production device based on power-on, and the movable production device is displayed among a plurality of types of operations included in the initial operation. This means that the operations are performed in order from the operation in which the ratio of hiding the device 41 is high. Therefore, it is possible not to disturb the visibility of the information displayed when the power is turned on.

In addition, a predetermined display operation is performed in a game machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result. A movable effect device, a display device 41 capable of displaying a decoration game corresponding to the game in a predetermined area, and an effect control device for controlling the movable effect device and the display device 41, and the effect control device is based on power-on. The movable effect device is configured to perform an initial operation, and among a plurality of types of operations included in the initial operation, the movable effect device sequentially performs an operation in which a predetermined area of the display device is hidden. .. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information displayed in the predetermined area from being visually recognized when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, if there is a detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation, that is, if there is a movable effect device that is not in the initial position, an initial operation table that performs a special initial operation according to the detected state is set. Initial operation is performed. In this initial operation table, first, a special initial operation is performed on the movable effect device corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state. In the special initial operation, a return operation of returning the movable effect device that is not in the initial position to the initial position is performed. Then, the movable effect device that has performed this special initial operation does not normally perform the initial operation. In other words, for the movable effect device that has performed the return operation, it is possible to confirm that the operation is performed by the return operation, so the initial operation is omitted, and in this respect, part of the normal initial operation is omitted, and the time required for the initial operation is reduced. It can be shortened. That is, when the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is performed as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

After performing this special initial operation, the normal initial operation is performed for the initial operation group that does not include the movable effect device whose detection sensor is not in the normal detection state. In addition, regarding the initial operation group that includes the movable effect device whose detection sensor is not in the normal detection state and has the movable effect device that is not the target of the special initial operation, Perform an initial operation other than the movable production device that performed the operation. It should be noted that no initial operation other than this special initial operation is performed for the initial operation group in which the special initial operation has been performed for all the movable effect devices to which it belongs.

140(b) to 140(d) and FIG. 141 show an example of the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation. FIG. 140(b) shows an initial operation table when the seventh detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are not at the initial positions. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a returning operation of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group B having the next priority order of the group A which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that have performed the special initial operation.

After that, the initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority order. Then, the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, which are movable effect devices that perform the initial operation by returning to the group A having the highest priority, but do not perform the special initial operation in the group A. Only perform the initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, regarding the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

FIG. 140C shows the initial operation table when the second detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second lower movable member 770 is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a returning operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed. Next, since the group C which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has performed the special initial operation has the lowest priority, the normal initial operation is performed by returning to the group A having the highest priority.

Next, the normal initial operation of the group B is performed, and the initial operation is performed only for the first lower movable members 740 and 741 which are the movable effect devices in the group C that have not performed the special initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, regarding the second lower movable member 770, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

In addition, since the first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 of the lower movable accessory unit 730 that is the group C are configured to be driven by one drive source, one movable effect device When the special initial operation is performed, it can be considered that the other movable effect device is also operable, and thus the other initial operation may not be performed again. That is, in the example of FIG. 140(c), the initial operation of the first lower movable member 740, 741 in the fourth execution order may be omitted.

FIG. 140D shows an initial operation table when the fifth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the first upper movable member 848 is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a returning operation of returning the first upper movable member 848 to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C having the next priority order of the group B that has performed the special initial operation.

After that, the process returns to the group A having the highest priority and the normal initial operation is performed. Then, in group B, the initial operation is performed on the movable member unit 820 that is the movable effect device that has not performed the special initial operation. This initial operation is an operation similar to the normal initial operation from the initial position to the operation completion position and then returning to the initial position. That is, in this case, regarding the first upper movable member 848, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

When the eighth detection sensor is not in the normal detection state, that is, when the second upper movable member 860 is not at the initial position, the returning operation of returning the second upper movable member 860 to the initial position may be performed. .. In this case, since the second upper movable member 860 does not operate in the normal initial operation, the group B performs the normal initial operation. Of course, it is not necessary to determine whether the eighth detection sensor is in the normal detection state. This is because the second upper movable member 860 only swings left and right, so that it does not affect the game even if it is not in the initial position.

When the special initial motion is performed as described above, the normal initial motion is sequentially performed for the initial motion group having the next priority order of the initial motion group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial motion. ing. Further, after performing the initial operation for the group C having the lowest priority, the process returns to the group A having the highest priority, and the initial operation is performed according to the priority until the initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices.

Further, when the plurality of movable effect devices are not at the initial position, a returning operation of returning each of them to the initial position is performed. In this case, the restoration operation is performed one by one in descending order of restoration priority in the special initial operation shown in FIG. The return priority order is set in order from the one closest to the display device 41, and the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the third central movable effect member 920, which are closest to the display device 41, are set. The fourth central movable effect member 930 has a higher rank, and the farthest first lower movable members 740 and 741 and the second lower movable member 770 have a lower rank.

In FIG. 141(a), when the sixth detection sensor and the seventh detection sensor are not in the normal detection state, that is, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920. And the initial operation table when the fourth central movable effect member 930 is not in the initial position is shown. In this case, first, a special initial operation (return operation) of returning the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 having higher return priority to the initial position is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, the return operation is performed. A special initial operation (return operation) of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, which have lower priorities, to the initial positions is performed.

Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group B having the next priority order of the group A which is the initial operation group including the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 that finally performed the special initial operation. .. After that, the normal initial operation of the group C is performed according to the priority order. In this case, since the special initial operation is performed for the group A, all the movable effect devices belonging to the group A are initially operated, and therefore the normal initial operation for the group A is not performed. That is, in this case, for the group A, the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

In FIG. 141(b), when the seventh detection sensor and the second detection sensor are not in the normal detection state, that is, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are shown. The initial operation table when not in the initial position is shown. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a special initial operation of returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 having a higher return priority to the initial position is performed, and after the special initial operation is completed, a return operation is performed. A special initial operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 having a lower priority to the initial position is performed.

Then, since the group C, which is the initial operation group including the second lower movable member 770 that has finally performed the special initial operation, has the lowest priority, the group A having the highest priority is returned to perform the initial operation. For group A, the special initial operation of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, so the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 that are not performing the initial operation. Only the initial operation of.

Next, the normal initial operation of group B is performed, and the initial operation of group C is performed. For the group C, since the returning operation of returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is performed, only the initial operation of the first lower movable members 740 and 741 which are not performing the initial operation is performed. That is, in this case, for the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770, an initial operation is a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted instead of the normal initial operation. I am trying.

FIG. 141C shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 are not in the normal detection state, that is, when the movable member unit 820 is not at the initial position. Of the movable member unit 820, the movable member unit (left) that is the drive mechanism 806 that performs the left operation and the movable member unit (right) that is the drive mechanism 806 that performs the right operation are basically operated simultaneously. There is a need. Therefore, when both the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 that detect these operation states are not in the normal detection state, first, as a special initial operation, the movable member unit (left) and the movable member unit (right) are used. Are simultaneously operated to perform a returning operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position.

Then, the normal initial operation is performed for the group C having the next priority order of the group B which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit 820 that has performed the special initial operation. After that, the group A having the highest priority is returned to and the initial operation is performed for all the movable effect devices according to the priority, but the group B is performing the special initial operation of the movable member unit 820, and thus the initial operation is not performed. The initial operation of only the first upper movable member 848 is performed. That is, in this case, regarding the movable member unit 820, a special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted is used as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation.

FIG. 141(d) shows an initial operation table when the third detection sensor 811 is not in the normal detection state, that is, when only the movable member unit (left) is not in the initial position. In this case, first, as a special initial operation, a returning operation of returning the movable member unit (left) to the initial position is performed. Next, the normal initial operation is performed on the group C having the next priority order of the group B which is the initial operation group including the movable member unit (left) that has performed the special initial operation.

Thereafter, the group A having the highest priority is returned to perform the normal initial operation, and then the group B performs the normal initial operation. In the group B, the movable member unit (left) performs the special initial operation, but the movable member unit (right) and the movable member unit (left) need to be operated simultaneously. Normal initial operation is performed.

That is, when one of the third detection sensor 811 and the fourth detection sensor 812 is not in the normal detection state, first, only the movable member unit (left or right) corresponding to the detection sensor that is not in the normal detection state performs the return operation. .. In this case, since the other movable member unit (left or right) is not performing the special initial operation, both movable member units (left and right) including the movable member unit (left or right) that has performed the returning operation later are included. ) Normally performs initial operation.

Note that the restoration priority order is the order closer to the display device 41, but the order may be other than this. For example, when there are movable effect devices that interfere with each other, such as when the operation ranges overlap, the restoration priority order may be set so as not to cause a problem due to the interference. For example, when the two movable effect devices are not in the initial position and one of the movable effect devices returns to the previous operation, if the other movable effect device collides with the other movable effect device, the other movable effect device returns to the first operation. Set the return priority to be high.

Further, the restoration priority order may be set such that the restoration operation is performed in order from the movable effect device having a large area overlapping with the display device 41. In the case of the present embodiment, since the area where the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910 overlap with the display device 41 is the largest, the return priority order is the highest. Hereinafter, since the movable member unit 820, the second lower movable member 770, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the first lower movable members 740 and 741 overlap in this order with the display device 41, the area becomes smaller. It is set so that the return priority becomes lower in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation where the display content is not visible by the movable effect device when the display of the display device 41 is started.

In addition, the return operation is performed in order from the movable effect device having a large area overlapping the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 which is the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed in the approximate center of the display area of the display device 41. The return priority may be set so as to perform. In the case of the present embodiment, since the movable member unit 820 has the largest area overlapping the display area of the decorative special figure variation display game, the return priority is set to the highest. Hereinafter, the second lower movable member 770, the first lower movable members 740 and 741, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930. Since the area overlapping the display area of the decorative special figure variable display game becomes smaller in order, the return priority order is set lower in this order. By doing so, it is possible to quickly eliminate a situation that hinders the visibility of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Further, as the decorative special figure variable display game, a first decorative special figure variable display game in which identification information is variably displayed on the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 provided in the approximate center of the display area of the display device 41, and 1 When executing a second decorative special figure variable display game in which the identification information is variably displayed on the second decorative game display portion 88 which is provided at a position closer to the periphery of the display area than the decorative special figure variable display game, The return priority order may be set according to the area that overlaps only one of the decorative special figure variation display games, or the return priority order may be set in consideration of the overlapping areas of both the decorative special figure variation display games. You may do it. For example, when the second decorative special figure variable display game is displayed earlier than the first decorative special figure variable display game after the power is turned on, the second decorative special figure variable display game is restored depending on the area overlapping only the second decorative special figure variable display game. It is preferable to set the priority order.

Also, when the special initial action is performed, the normal initial action is performed for the initial action group that has the next priority order of the initial action group including the movable effect device that has performed the special initial action, but this is not the only option. It is not something that can be done. For example, after performing the special initial operation, the initial operation may be sequentially performed in the order of priority from the group A having the first priority. Immediately after performing the special initial action, the initial action may be performed for the initial action group including the movable effect device that performed the special initial action. Further, the initial operation may be performed from a group having many areas overlapping with the display area 41 or from a group having many areas overlapping with the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85.

Next, an alternative initial operation performed when there is a malfunction during the initial operation will be described. In the present embodiment, when there is a malfunction in the initial operation of the group B, it is possible to substitute another operation in the group B as the initial operation.

The normal initial operation of group B is shown in FIG. In this normal initial operation, first, in process 1, the movable member unit 820 is lowered from the state in which the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable member 848, and the second upper movable member 860 are in the initial positions (see FIG. 9). To the operation completion position (see FIG. 10). Next, in step 2, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated (see FIG. 11), and in step 3, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position (see FIG. 10). Then, in step 4, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position (see FIG. 9) is performed.

In the normal initial operation of this group B, if there is an operation failure in which the movable member unit 820 does not descend to the operation completion position in the process 1, the operation failure error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set and the alternative initial operation is set. .. In this case, the alternative initial operation 1 shown in FIG. 142(b) is set. In this alternative initial operation 1, first, in step 5, the first upper movable member 848 is rotated, and in step 6, the first upper movable member 848 is returned to the initial position. Then, in step 7, an operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. Note that step 7 is performed when the movable member unit 820 is in an operation failure that operates from the initial position but does not operate to the operation completion position, and is performed when the movable member unit 820 is an operation failure that does not operate from the initial position. Absent.

In addition, if there is a malfunction in which the first upper movable member 848 does not rotate in the process 2 in the normal initial operation of the group B or the process 5 in the alternative initial operation 1, the malfunction error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set. And set an alternative initial action. In this case, the alternative initial operation 2 shown in FIG. 142(c) is set. In this alternative initial operation 2, first, the second upper movable member 860 is swung in the process 8, and the second upper movable member 860 is returned to the initial position in the process 9. Then, in step 10, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed. It should be noted that step 10 is not performed when the movable member unit 820 is malfunctioning and does not operate from the initial position.

Further, when there is a malfunction in which the second upper movable member 860 does not swing in the process 8 in the alternative initial motion 2 of the group B, the malfunction error flag of the second upper movable member 860 is set and the alternative initial motion is performed. Set. In this case, the alternative initial operation 3 shown in FIG. 142(d) is set. In the alternative initial operation 3, the operation of returning the movable member unit 820 to the initial position is performed as step 11. Note that the operation is not performed when the movable member unit 820 has a malfunction that does not operate from the initial position.

If there is a malfunction in any other process, it is treated as if there is no alternative initial motion. For example, when there is a malfunction in which the first upper movable member 848 does not return to the initial position in the process 3 of the normal initial motion, the malfunction error flag of the first upper movable member 848 is set, but the alternative initial motion is not set. No, go to step 4. Further, if there is a malfunction in which the movable member unit 820 does not rise to the initial position in process 4 of the normal initial motion, the malfunction error flag of the movable member unit 820 is set, but the alternative initial motion is not set. In this case, the rise of the movable member unit 820 may be abandoned and the initial operation of the group C may be performed, or an error notification may be performed and the initial operation may be stopped. It should be noted that the alternative initial operation may be performed immediately when there is a malfunction, or the alternative initial operation may be performed after retrying the operation that is malfunctioning several times.

That is, when the operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 forms the first initial operation and the first initial operation cannot be executed normally, the second initial operation of swinging the second upper movable member 860 is performed. You are trying to perform an action. When the first initial operation of rotating the first upper movable member 848 can be normally executed, the second initial operation of swinging the second upper movable member 860 is not executed.

[Operation substitution process]
FIG. 143 shows the operation substitution process (step C393) in the above-described variation effect setting process (see FIG. 127). In this operation substitution process, when the above-mentioned alternative initial operation is performed, it is possible to replace the operation that has malfunctioned with the alternative operation. In this operation substitution process, first, it is determined whether or not the effect operation set as the effect such as the notice effect or the variable effect has the object of the operation failure error flag (step C501). The malfunction flag is set corresponding to the movable member that has malfunctioned in the initial operation. This indicates that the movable member to which the malfunction error flag is set cannot operate normally.

When there is no target of the operation failure error flag in the rendering operation (step C501; N), the operation substitution process ends. In addition, when there is a target of the operation failure error flag in the effect operation (step C501; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an alternative operation (step C502). The alternative operation in this embodiment corresponds to the operation of the second upper movable member 860 when the second upper movable member 860 is operable when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning. Further, it corresponds to an operation of only moving the movable member unit 820 up and down when the first upper movable member 848 and the second upper movable member 860 are malfunctioning.

If there is an alternative operation (step C502; Y), the operation targeted by the operation failure error flag is replaced with the alternative operation (step C503), and the operation alternative process ends. If there is no alternative action (step C502; N), the action alternative process ends. That is, when the first upper movable member 848 is malfunctioning and the effect operation for operating the first upper movable member 848 is selected, if the second upper movable member 860 is operable, the first upper movable member 848 is first. The operation of the second upper movable member 860 is performed instead of the operation of the upper movable member 848. In this case, when the second upper movable member 860 is also malfunctioning, only the operation of moving the movable member unit 820 up and down is performed. Further, when the movable member unit 820 is also malfunctioning, there is no substitute operation, and thus the first upper movable member 848, the second upper movable member 860, and the movable member unit 820 are not operated.

Further, if the operation of the movable member is selected when the movable members other than the first upper movable member 848 are malfunctioning, there is no substitute operation, so the operation of the movable member is not performed. The operation of the movable effect device may be set as an alternative operation. For example, when the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, or the fourth central movable effect member 930 is malfunctioning, the movable member unit 820, the first upper movable effect. The operation of the member 848 or the second upper movable member 860 may be set to the alternative operation. Moreover, although the alternative operation is performed by the movable effect device, the alternative effect may be performed by the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LED, the output of the sound, or the like.

If there are many operation modes, the third initial operation when the second initial operation cannot be executed normally or the subsequent initial operations may be set. Further, although the normal initial operation and the alternative initial operation are operations that may be executed in the game, operations that may not be executed in the game may be included in the initial operation.

In addition, instead of changing the effect once set in the action substitution process, if there is a malfunction error flag, select the effect using a table in which the action corresponding to the malfunction error flag is not included in the options. It may be done.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a predetermined effect Movable rendering device that performs an operation (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first center movable movable member 900, The second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930), and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device are provided. The means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on, and the initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation different from the first initial operation. When the first initial operation can be normally executed, the second initial operation is not performed, and when the first initial operation cannot be normally executed, the second initial operation can be executed. Therefore, the initial operation can be simplified, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened, and the game can be started quickly.

Further, the first initial action and the second initial action are actions that can be executed in the game production, and the first initial action is an action that suggests that the player is more advantageous than the second initial action. There will be. Therefore, first, it is possible to confirm the operation regarding the operation suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state.

Further, the effect control means, when the first initial operation is not normally ended in the initial operation but the second initial operation is normally ended, the operation corresponding to the first initial operation is selected in the game effect. In this case, the operation corresponding to the second initial operation is performed instead of the operation corresponding to the first initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the influence on the effect of the game and prevent the interest of the game from being lowered.

In addition, with regard to the movable effect device having different positions depending on the game state, the initial operation may not be performed depending on the situation. For example, in the case of a movable effect device in which the operation is controlled so that the probability state, which is one of the game states, is in the initial position in the low probability state and not in the initial position in the high probability state. Even if the initial state is not present when the power is turned on, if the production control device 300 can understand that the probability state is the high probability state, the initial operation including the special initial operation (return operation) is not performed. Then, the movable effect device may be kept at the same position. Thereby, the initial operation can be omitted and the game can be restarted quickly.

When it is possible to grasp that the probability state is a high probability state, for example, when a power failure recovery command indicating that the state before the power failure occurs is normally returned from the game control device 100, or the probability status information is received. As a case where the information indicating the high probability state is received. On the contrary, when the RAM initialization command is received, the probability state becomes the low probability state, so that the special initial operation is performed when the RAM initialization command is not present. In addition to the stochastic state, the game state may be a time saving state, an effect mode, a latent latency change state, or the like. Even for the movable effect devices having different positions depending on these states, when the game state can be grasped, the initial operation including the special initial operation is not performed, and the movable effect device is kept at the position as it is. You may do it.

Further, not only the initial operation may not be performed depending on the gaming state, but the return priority may be changed depending on the gaming state. That is, you may provide the initial operation table according to a game state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are in a high probability state or a time saving state. In some cases, it is arranged at the operation completion position overlapping the front side of the display device 41, and is controlled so as to temporarily return to the initial position when the reach state develops. In addition, when it is not in the high probability state or in the time saving state, it is arranged at the initial position, and when the reach state develops, it is controlled to temporarily move to the operation completion position. Since it may be placed at the operation completion position for a long time in this way, in each central movable effect member, a magnet is provided on the end surface facing the adjacent central movable effect member, and the attraction force of the magnet causes The center movable effect members are assisted in being maintained at the operation completion position.

When it is possible to grasp that each of these central movable effect members is not in the initial position before the start of the initial operation and is in the high probability state or the time saving state, the return priority is set to the lowest, The initial action table in which the initial action according to the return priority is defined is selected. In this case, since each central movable effect member does not need to be in the initial position, there is no problem as it is, and it is better to prioritize the returning operation of other movable effect devices. The return priority of the central movable effect member should be the lowest.

In addition, if it is not possible to know that there is a high probability state or a time saving state, or if it is not that these states (normal probability state and not time saving state), then the return priority is set to the highest. The initial action table in which the initial action according to the return priority is defined is selected. In this case, each central movable effect member is in a state in which it must be in the initial position, and since each central movable effect member is close to the display device 41 and has a large area to be covered, it is necessary to prioritize the return operation. The return priority of each central movable effect member is set to be the highest.

Although the initial operation is always performed when the power is turned on, the initial operation may not be performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, when a power failure recovery command is received when the power is turned on, the power failure has been normally restored, so that the movable effect device is assumed to have no problem and the initial operation is not performed, and the RAM initialization command is received when the power is turned on. Only the initial operation may be performed.

Further, when a power failure occurs and the power is restored during the execution of the special figure variation display game, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game restarted when the power is restored. Further, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variation display game newly started after the power failure is restored. In this case, the initial operation may be performed regardless of the progress of the effect, or the initial operation may be performed corresponding to the progress of the effect. Further, all the initial operations may be performed in one special figure variation display game, or the initial operations may be dispersed over a plurality of special figure variation display games. When performing an initial action corresponding to the progress of the effect, a specific effect including the operation of the movable effect device that allows the operation as the initial operation to be performed as the effect of the special figure variation display game is set. To In addition, even if a power failure occurs during execution of the special figure variation display game and the system is not restored, the initial operation is not performed only when the power is turned on. When the game is executed, the initial operation may be performed in the special figure variable display game.

Further, as a special initial operation for the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation, the movable effect device may be operated so as to join the normal initial operation from the position where the movable effect device is stopped. The normal initial operation is an operation of returning from the initial position to the maximum operation position and then returning to the initial position. Therefore, the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state before the start of the initial operation is in the state of being stopped in the process of performing the normal initial operation. Therefore, among the normal initial operations, the operations from the initial position to the position where the movable effect device is stopped may be omitted and the remaining operations may be performed.

Further, although the detection sensor can detect that the movable effect device is at the initial position, it may be able to detect not only the initial position but also another specific position, and the entire operating range. It may be possible to detect at which position over the range, and the mode of the initial operation may be set according to the detected position. In addition, the normal detection state is the detection state when the movable performance device is in the initial position, but the detection state when the movable performance device is in the position where it should exist when the power is turned on may be the normal detection state. Does not necessarily have to be the initial position.

Although the initial operation of the board effect device 44 provided in the game board 30 has been described here, when a movable effect device is provided in the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15, the movable effect device is also applicable. is there. Further, the pachinko gaming machine has been described, but other gaming machines such as a slot machine can be applied as long as it has a movable effect device.

From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the gaming machine to be generated, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device (first). ~ Seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control means is powered on. When the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation. When the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the operation is not the normal detection state, it is possible to perform the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation. It will be. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, a plurality of movable effect devices are provided, and position detecting means corresponding to each movable effect device is provided, and the effect control means is a movable effect effect in which the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is the normal detection state. A normal initial operation may be performed as an initial operation for the device, and a special initial operation may be performed instead of the normal initial operation as the initial operation for the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state. It was made possible. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, the production control means, when all the detection results by the respective position detection means before the start of the initial operation are in the normal detection state, causes the plurality of movable production devices to perform the normal initial operation in a predetermined order, If at least one of the detection results by the position detection means before the start of the operation is not in the normal detection state, after the special initial operation is performed on the movable effect device whose detection result by the position detection means is not in the normal detection state, other movable movements are sequentially performed. This means that the effect device is initially operated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as interference with other movable effect devices by operating from a movable effect device that is not in a normal position. Further, by performing the special initial operation one by one, the operations can be confirmed one by one, and it becomes easy to grasp the abnormal state.

Further, the position detection means is capable of detecting that the movable effect device is at the initial position, and the state in which the movable effect device is detected at the initial position is the normal detection state. As an operation, the operation of returning from the initial position and then returning to the initial position is performed, and as the special initial operation, only the operation of returning to the initial position is performed. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed based on the satisfaction of the start condition, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is generated. The machine includes a plurality of movable effect devices that perform predetermined effect operations, position detection means that can detect the position of each movable effect device, and effect control means that controls the operation of the movable effect devices. The means is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable effect device when the power is turned on. If a plurality of detection results by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation are not in the normal detection state, the detection result by the position detection means That is, the movable effect devices that are not in the normal detection state are operated one by one to be in the normal detection state. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the abnormal state of the gaming machine.

In addition, the display control device 41 includes a display device 41 for performing an effect display related to the game, and the effect control means displays the movable effect devices that are not in the normal detection state by the position detection means when operating one by one in the normal detection state. The operation is performed according to a predetermined order so that the movable effect device close to the device 41 operates. Therefore, the situation that hinders the visibility of the display can be quickly eliminated. As a result, the timing at which the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41 becomes visible can be accelerated, and the restart of the game can be accelerated, and the timing at which the abnormality notification on the display device 41 can be visually recognized is also accelerated. Can be grasped quickly.

Further, the effect control means is predetermined so as not to interfere with other movable effect devices when the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detecting means are not in the normal detection state are operated one by one into the normal detection state. The operations are performed according to the order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of interfering with other movable effect devices by the operation.

In addition, the display control device 41 is provided with a display device 41 for performing a game effect display, and the effect control means can display a decorative variable display game in which the result mode is stopped and displayed after the plurality of identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the game. When operating the movable effect devices whose detection results by the position detection means are not in the normal detection state one by one, the movable effect device having a large range overlapping with the display area of the decorative variable display game is operated. As described above, the operations are performed according to a predetermined order. Therefore, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that hinders the visibility of the game.

In addition, the display control device 41 includes a display device 41 for performing an effect display related to the game, and the effect control means displays the movable effect devices that are not in the normal detection state by the position detection means when operating one by one in the normal detection state. This means that the movable effect device having a large overlapping range with the device 41 is operated according to a predetermined order. Therefore, it is possible to quickly eliminate the situation that impairs the visibility of the display (decorative special figure variation display game, abnormality notification, etc.).

Next, the change of the effect mode in the state where the notice effect is being executed will be described. The effect on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 144(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 for displaying the first decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games. In this case, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by variably displaying the identification information in each of the left, center, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display. In the upper left part of the display area, a second decoration game display section 88 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display section 88 is the same as the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85, and is the left area, the middle area, and the right area. After the identification information is variably displayed, it is stopped and the result is displayed.

Further, at the lower center of the display area, a storage display section 83 for displaying a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to starting memory is provided. The memory display unit 83 is provided with a first memory display unit 83a that displays the first startup memory and a second memory display unit 83b that displays the second startup memory. The decoration special figure starting memory display displayed on the first memory display portion 83a corresponds to the first starting memory one-to-one, and is displayed side by side in the memory order. Here, there are four first starting memories. It is shown that. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is consumed.

Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to each starting memory and the pre-read result such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In FIG. 144(a), a pre-reading effect is performed in which the display mode of the decorative special drawing start memory display is changed for the first start memory having the first, third, and fourth digestion orders. Further, the second memory display section 83b displays a decorative special figure starting memory display which has a one-to-one correspondence with the second starting memory similarly to the first memory displaying section 83a. Here, it is indicated that the second starting memory is 0.

On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, there is provided a running storage display unit 84 that displays information regarding the starting storage corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. The special special figure starting storage display at the left end of the first storage display section 83a or the second storage display section 83b is moved to the running storage display section 84 at the start of the special figure variation display game, and is executed. The result of the variable display game, the variation pattern, and the like are suggested by the display mode.

In the upper right part of the display area, a starting memory number display unit 86 that displays the starting memory number is provided. The starting memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first starting memory number display unit 86a that displays the number of first starting memories and a second starting memory number display unit 86b that displays the number of second starting memories. ing. Further, an effect mode display unit 89 that displays the current effect mode is provided at the upper center of the display area. Here, it is shown that it is the first mode of the probability variation mode.

When the first starting memory is exhausted and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 144(a), the decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end of the first memory display section 83a is displayed as shown in FIG. 144(b). A display is made to flow into the section 84. Here, the result and variation pattern of the special figure variation display game are also suggested in the same manner as the look-ahead effect in the running memory display unit 84. Further, in the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display unit 86a is decreased by one.

Then, the decorative special figure variable display game display section 85 starts the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory, and is identified in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas. The variable display of information is started. Also, in the second decoration game display unit 88, the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory is started, and the identification information is displayed in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. The variable display is started.

After that, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area of the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85. In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed so as to shake, indicating that it is not completely stopped. That is, the temporarily stopped state is equivalent to the variable display. When the same identification information is stopped in the left variation display area and the right variation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may stop in the left variation display area and the right variation display area and the reach state may not be reached. In the reach state, the first half change is until the right change display area is temporarily stopped, and the second half change is thereafter. If the reach is not reached, only the first half fluctuation will occur.

When the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 144(c), the identification information of the decorative special figure variation display game display section 85 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed. In the second decoration game display unit 88, the variable display of the identification information is continued in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area during the changing time, and at the end of the changing time, the left area, the middle area, and the right area are displayed. The variable display of the identification information ends, the identification information stops, and the result mode is displayed. That is, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are asynchronous from the time when the identification information is temporarily stopped in one variable display area in the first decoration game until the variable display ends and the identification information is stopped. Become. By doing so, even if the reach effect is not performed by replacing the effect, it is not necessary to perform the change process for the second decoration game, and the process is simplified. Further, the display of the in-execution storage display unit 84 is erased with the end of the variable time. Then, when the stop time for displaying the result mode ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game end, and the next decoration special figure variation display game can be started.

In this example, a mode changing operation for changing the effect mode from the first mode to the second mode is performed during variable display. When the mode changing operation is performed during the variable display, the effect mode is changed at the timing when the special figure variable display game being executed is finished. That is, even if the mode changing operation is performed, the effect mode remains the first mode of the probability variation mode until the stop time shown in FIG. 144(c) ends, and when this stop time ends, the probability variation mode first The mode is changed to the 2 mode, and as shown in FIG. 144(d), the next special figure variation display game is executed in the second mode of the probability variation mode.

144(e) to (h) show an example in which the second mode of the probability variation mode is changed to the first mode. Basically, it is similar to the case shown in FIGS. 144(a) to (d), but in the state of FIG. 144(h), the look-ahead effect for the first starting memory having the first digestion order is completed. The difference is.

The notice production of the present embodiment includes specific notice productions that can be executed in the same execution mode in a plurality of production modes but have different contents suggested by the notice productions in each production mode. When the effect mode is changed while the specific notice effect is being executed, the particular notice effect can be ended if a certain condition is satisfied. This certain condition is more disadvantageous for the player to the content suggested by the specific notice production of the same display mode in the changed production mode than the content suggested by the particular notice production in the production mode before the change. This is also the case when the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory that is the target of the specific notice effect is out of alignment. That is, this is a case where the reliability of the big hit suggested by the specific notice presentation is lowered by changing the presentation mode. In such a case, the notice is given a downgraded impression to the player, so the notice effect itself is ended.

FIG. 145 shows the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display and the reliability of each display mode being a big hit shown in each effect mode. The reliability of the big hit is the probability that the result is a special result in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory corresponding to the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed in the display mode. Therefore, the higher the reliability, the higher the possibility of a special result.

In the staging mode, it is clear that it is a low probability mode that clearly shows that it is not a low probability state and a short time state, a positive change mode that clearly shows that it is a high probability state and a short time state, and a low probability state and a short time state. There are a time saving mode shown in (1) and a latent mode showing the time saving state without clearly indicating whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state. Further, these effect modes include a first mode and a second mode.

The low probability mode, the probability variation mode, the time saving mode, and the latent mode are selected according to the type of special result and the effect mode when the special result is derived. That is, the transitions of the low accuracy mode, the probability variation mode, the time saving mode, and the latent mode are performed regardless of the player's intention. On the other hand, the first mode and the second mode in each effect mode are selected based on a mode selection operation by the player (for example, operation of the effect button 25). That is, the transition between the first mode and the second mode can be performed by the player's intention.

White display mode 1 is a state in which the prefetching notice effect is not executed, and other display modes 2 to 5 are states in which the prefetching notice effect is being executed. Further, the pre-reading notice effect of the display mode 2 indicated by the black triangle in the pre-reading notice effect has the same reliability set in any of the effect modes. Other pre-reading notice effects may have different degrees of reliability depending on the effect mode even if they have the same display mode. The notice effect whose reliability may vary depending on the effect mode makes a specific notice effect different in content suggested in each effect mode.

When the effect mode is changed while the specific notice effect is being executed, the reliability shown in FIG. 145 is compared before and after the change, and the reliability in the effect mode after the change is higher than that before the change. Is low, and if the result of the special figure variation display game based on the target starting memory is unsatisfactory, the specific notice effect is ended.

In the example shown in FIG. 144, FIGS. 144A to 144D show a case where the first mode of the probability variation mode changes to the second mode of the probability variation mode. Regarding the specific notice effect that is a white star-shaped display mode, the reliability in the first mode of the probability change mode that is the effect mode before the change is 15%, and the second of the probability change mode that is the effect mode after the change is the second. The reliability in the mode is 35%. Therefore, since the reliability increases due to the change, the specific notice effect is continued in the changed effect mode as shown in FIG. 144(d). It should be noted that the look-ahead advance notice effect indicated by the black triangle has the same reliability in any of the effect modes, and therefore is continued in the changed effect mode.

144(e) to (h) show a case where the second mode of the probability variation mode changes to the first mode of the probability variation mode. Regarding the specific notice effect that is a white star-shaped display mode, the reliability in the second mode of the probability change mode that is the effect mode before the change is 35%, and the first of the probability change mode that is the effect mode after the change is the first. The reliability in the mode is 15%. Further, here, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory, which is the subject of the notice, is disappointing. Therefore, with the change to the changed effect mode, the specific notice effect is ended as shown in FIG. 144(h).

[Production mode management processing]
FIG. 146 shows the effect mode management processing (step C21) in the above-mentioned main processing (see FIG. 119). In this effect mode management process, change of the effect mode based on the mode changing operation by the player is managed. In this effect mode management process, first, it is determined whether it is an effect selectable period (step C511). The production selectable period is a period during which the production mode change based on the mode change operation is accepted. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the production selectable period is a period excluding the period from the time when the identification information is temporarily stopped on the decorative special view variation display game display unit 85 to the end of the stop time. Of course, the production selectable period can be set arbitrarily.

If it is not this production selectable period (step C511; N), the process moves to step C514. If it is during the effect selectable period (step C511; Y), it is determined whether a mode change operation has been performed (step C512). If there is no mode change operation (step C512; N), the process proceeds to step C514. If there is a mode change operation (step C512; Y), a change reservation flag corresponding to the mode change operation is set (step C512), and the process proceeds to step C514.

As described above, even if the mode change operation is performed during the variable display, the effect mode is not changed until the special figure variation display game ends. Therefore, when the mode change operation is performed, the change reservation is made. I am trying to set a flag. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect modes that can be changed by the mode changing operation are the first mode and the second mode, and the change reservation flag also includes information indicating which of the effect modes is waiting for the change. .. When setting the change reservation flag, if there is a mode change operation while the change reservation flag is not set yet, the change reservation flag corresponding to the change to the effect mode different from the current effect mode is set. Also, if a mode change operation is performed while the change reservation flag is already set, the change reservation flag corresponding to the change to the effect mode different from the effect mode corresponding to the set change reservation flag is set. Set. That is, each time the mode changing operation is performed, a change reservation flag corresponding to a different effect mode is set.

Next, it is determined whether there is a change reservation flag (step C514), and when there is no change reservation flag (step C514; N), the effect mode management process is ended. If there is a change reservation flag (step C514; Y), it is determined whether the effect mode can be changed (step C515). The state in which the production mode can be changed is the timing when the resulting stop time has ended or the customer waiting state. If the effect mode cannot be changed (step C515; N), the effect mode management process ends. If the effect mode can be changed (step C515; Y), the effect mode corresponding to the change reservation flag is compared with the current effect mode (step C516) to determine whether they are the same. (Step C517).

If they are the same (step C517; Y), the change reservation flag is cleared (step C520), and the effect mode management process ends. In this case, the player selects the same effect mode as the current effect mode by performing the mode changing operation an even number of times. If they are not the same (step C517; N), the effect mode corresponding to the change reservation flag is set (step C518), and the notice changing process for performing the process of ending the specific notice effect is performed (step C519). After that, the change reservation flag is cleared (step C520), and the effect mode management process ends. In this case, the player has performed the mode changing operation an odd number of times, thereby selecting a production mode different from the current production mode.

[Production mode switching setting processing]
FIG. 147 shows the effect mode switching setting process (step C278) in the above-described single shot system command process (see FIG. 122). In this effect mode switching setting process, change of the effect mode by selection in the game control device 100 is managed. In this effect mode switching setting process, first, the effect mode corresponding to the command is set (step C521), and the notice changing process for performing the process of ending the specific notice effect is performed (step C522), and the effect mode switching setting process is performed. To finish.

[Advance notice change processing]
FIG. 148 shows the notice changing process (steps C519 and C522) in the above-mentioned production mode management processing and production mode switching setting processing. In this notice change processing, first, it is determined whether or not the specific notice effect is being executed (step C531). Then, when the specific notice effect is not being executed (step C531; N), the notice changing process is ended. If the specific notice effect is being executed (step C531; Y), the specific notice effect to be processed is selected (step C532). In the selection of the specific notice effect to be processed, if there are a plurality of decorative special figure starting memory displays that are executing the particular notice effect, one of the particular notice effects that has not been processed after step C533 is set. .. As a result, the processes are sequentially performed for each specific announcement effect.

Next, the reliability before and after the effect mode is changed is compared (step C533), and it is determined whether the changed reliability is lower (step C534). If the reliability after the change is not lower (step C534; N), the process proceeds to step C537. In this case, the specific notice effect to be processed is not changed. If the changed reliability is lower (step C534; Y), it is determined whether the result is a big hit (step C535). When the result is a big hit (step C535; Y), the process proceeds to step C537. In this case, the specific notice effect to be processed is not changed.

If the result is not a big hit (step C535; N), the end of the target specific notice effect is set (step C536). After that, it is determined whether or not all the specific notice effects have been processed (step C537), and if not processed (step C537; N), the process returns to step C532. If the processing has been completed (step C537; Y), the advance notice changing processing ends.

In the above description, the case of changing the look-ahead notice effect in the decorative special figure starting memory display has been described, but the notice effect other than this may be changed. For example, when the effect mode is changed during execution of the continuous announcement executed over a plurality of special figure variable display games, the process of changing or ending the continuous announcement may be performed. In addition, when the effect mode can be changed during the changing time in accordance with the mode changing operation, the effect mode is also applied to the notice effect that is started after the special figure changing display game is started with respect to the special figure changing display game being executed. It may be changed or terminated in accordance with the change.

Further, in the advance notice changing process shown in FIG. 148, the target advance notice effect is ended when the starting memory has a poor result and the reliability after changing the effect mode is lower. The specific announcement effect may be ended when the decrease in the value of is equal to or more than a certain value. For example, if the decrease in the reliability value shown in FIG. 145 is greater than 10 before and after the change, the specific notice effect is ended. As an example, when the second mode of the probability variation mode is changed to the first mode, the specific notice effect is ended because the decrease of the value is 20 for the display form 3 shown by the white star, but the black star is displayed. With respect to the display mode 4 shown by, since the decrease in value is 10, the specific notice effect is continued.

Further, the specific notice effect is ended when the reliability decreases, but the specific notice effect may be ended when the reliability increases, or in both cases, that is, when the reliability changes. Alternatively, the specific notice production may be ended. In this case, the specific notice effect may be ended when the change amount of the reliability value is equal to or more than a certain value, and a certain value when the reliability becomes high and a certain value when the reliability becomes low are set. Different values may be used.

Further, when a new start memory is generated in a state where the change reservation flag has been set by the player's mode change operation when the mode cannot be changed but the effect mode has not been changed yet, The notice effect may be selected using a table dedicated to change reservation.

For example, regarding the prefetch notice effect, selection is performed in the prefetch lottery process (step C321) in the prefetch variable system command process shown in FIG. 124. In this selection, the selection rate according to the current effect mode is defined. Selection is made using a selection table. As an exception to this, if there is a change reservation flag, a dedicated table during change reservation is used as the selection table.

Only a part of the display modes can be selected in the table dedicated to this change. As a part of this display mode, only the display mode having the same reliability in the current effect mode and the effect mode reserved for change can be selected, and the display mode is not changed even if the effect mode is changed. To For example, in the low accuracy mode, only display mode 2 and display mode 3 can be selected. Only the display mode 2 can be selected in modes other than the low accuracy mode. Further, some display modes may be set to other settings, for example, display modes 4 and 5 having high reliability may not be selectable, or only display mode 1 may be selectable. Is also good. Further, only the display modes 1 and 5 may be selectable.

Further, when there is a change reservation flag, the advance notice may be selected by using a selection table according to the contents of the change reservation flag instead of using the dedicated table during change. For example, in the case of the first mode of the probability variation mode, if the change to the second mode is reserved, the notice effect may be selected using the selection table of the second mode.

Also, not only when there is a change reservation flag, but also when it is known that the effect mode changes due to a change in the game state, similarly, the notice effect is selected using the changed effect mode selection table. You can For example, if the newly generated starting memory in the time saving mode is the starting memory executed after the end of the time saving state and is executed in the low-accuracy mode, the notice effect is produced using the low-accuracy mode selection table. select. When the effect mode changes due to a change in the game state, the effect mode before the change is set for the first mode and the second mode. For example, if the time saving mode is the first mode of the time saving mode at the end of the time saving state, the first mode of the low accuracy mode is set.

Further, although the specific notice effect can be ended with the change of the effect mode, the notice effect other than the specific notice effect may be ended with the change of the effect mode. Further, the notice effect that has ended due to the change in the effect mode may be restarted when the original effect mode is returned to. In this case, the display may be restarted in the display mode at the end, or may be restarted in the newly selected display mode.

Further, when the effect mode is changed, both the notice effect in the effect mode before the change and the notice effect in the effect mode after the change may be displayed. Further, the display area is divided into two parts, one of which displays the first mode to enable execution of the notice effect in the first mode, and the other of which displays the second mode to show notice effect in the second mode. May be executable.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, The production control means (production control device 300) is provided, and the production control means is configured to select one production mode from a plurality of production modes and execute the production of the game according to the production mode. When the effect mode is changed while the notice effect is being executed, the notice effect can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as inconsistencies in the contents of the notice production, and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, when the effect mode is changed while the notice effect is being executed, the effect control means is more likely to perform the notice effect in the changed effect mode than in the effect mode in the effect mode before the change. If the content suggested by is more advantageous to the player, the advance notice effect is continuously executed. Therefore, the player can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

When the production mode is changed while the notice effect is being executed, the effect control means, if the game subject to the notice of the notice effect has a special result, continues to execute the notice effect. It has been done. Therefore, the player can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means is configured to suggest the possibility of a special result of the game of the notice target in the notice production. Therefore, the player can be expected and the interest of the game can be improved.

The notice effect related to the game can be executed in the same execution mode in a plurality of effect modes, but includes the specific notice effect different in the content suggested by the notice effect in each effect mode, and executes the specific notice effect. When the effect mode is changed in the state of being displayed, the specific notice effect can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as inconsistencies in the contents of the notice production, and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

[First Modification]
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured to reselect the notice effect with the change of the effect mode.

[Advance notice change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the notice changing process shown in FIG. 149 is performed instead of the notice changing process shown in FIG. 148. In the advance notice changing process, first, the starting memory to be processed is selected (step C541). Here, the reselection is performed for all the starting memories, but the reselection may be performed only for the specific notice effect being executed as in the above-described first embodiment.

Next, reselection is performed at the selection rate in the changed effect mode (step C542). Then, it is determined whether the reselected display mode has higher reliability than the display mode before the change of the effect mode (step C543). When the reliability of the reselected display mode is higher than the display mode before the change of the effect mode (step C543; Y), the reselected display mode is set (step C545), and the process proceeds to step C546. .. In this case, the display mode is changed to have a higher reliability, so that the player's sense of expectation can be increased and interest can be improved.

In addition, when the reliability of the reselected display mode is not higher than that of the display mode before the change of the effect mode (step C543; N), that is, the reliability of the reselected display mode is lower or If they are the same, it is determined whether the result is a big hit (step C544). If the result is not a big hit (step C544; N), the process moves to step C546. If the result is a big hit (step C544; Y), the re-selected specific notice effect is set (step C545), and the process proceeds to step C546.

When the reliability of the reselected display mode is lower or the same, the display mode displayed in the presentation mode before the change is basically maintained. If the reliability of the reselected display mode is lower, the player's interest may be reduced, and no change is made. However, if the result is a big hit, the display mode is reselected. As a result, it is informed that the change to the display mode with low reliability will be a big hit. Also, when the same display mode is selected by reselection, the display mode is maintained regardless of whether it is a big hit, but with the expectation that it includes a possibility of being a big hit for the player, Even if the display mode is not changed, a high expectation can be provided.

Note that the display mode may be changed only when the reliability of the reselected display mode is higher than the determination in step C544. Further, the determination of steps C543 and C544 may not be performed and the reselected display mode may be set.

From the above, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control means (effect control device 300) reselects the notice effect according to the selection rate in the changed effect mode. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the more detailed reliability by switching a plurality of times, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, if the content suggested by the re-selected notice effect is more advantageous to the player than the content suggested by the pre-change notice effect, the re-selected notice effect is executed. This is what I did.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is configured to select the notice effect at the selection rate of each effect mode regardless of the current effect mode.

FIG. 150 shows the contents of the prefetch information storage area provided in the RAM of effect control device 300. As shown in FIG. 150(a), the prefetch information storage area corresponds to each of the starting memories 1 to 4 for each of the first starting memory (special figure 1) and the second starting memory (special figure 2). Areas 1 to 8 which are areas for storing prefetch information are provided. Starting memories 1 to 4 indicate the digestion order in each special drawing type, and the one having the earliest digestion order is the starting memory 1, and the starting memories 2, 3, and 4 are digested in this order. When the starting memory is consumed in one special figure type, the information of the subsequent areas in the consumed special figure type is advanced one by one and the information of the area corresponding to the starting memory 4 is erased. For example, when one first starting memory is exhausted, the information in the areas 2 to 4 is advanced to the areas 1 to 3 one by one, and the information in the area 4 is erased.

FIG. 150(b) shows the contents stored in each area. Each area is provided with an area for storing look-ahead results for all effect modes. Then, in the prefetch lottery process (step C321) in the prefetch variable system command process shown in FIG. 124, the advance notice selection is made at the selection rate of each production mode based on the prefetch information from the game control device 100 for the corresponding starting memory. Then, the results are stored in the corresponding areas.

[Advance notice change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the advance notice changing process shown in FIG. 151 is performed instead of the advance notice changing process shown in FIG. 148. In the advance notice changing process, first, the starting memory to be processed is selected (step C551). Here, the reselection is performed for all the starting memories, but the reselection may be performed only for the specific notice effect being executed as in the above-described first embodiment.

Next, the selection result for the changed effect mode is acquired (step C552). As described above, since the result of selecting the notice effect at the selection rate of each effect mode is stored in the prefetch information storage area, the corresponding information is acquired from here. Then, it is determined whether the acquired display mode has higher reliability than the display mode before the change of the effect mode (step C553).

When the acquired display mode has higher reliability than the display mode before the change of the effect mode (step C553; Y), the acquired display mode is set (step C555), and the process proceeds to step C556. In this case, the display mode is changed to a higher reliability, so that the player's expectation can be increased and the interest can be improved.

Moreover, when the reliability of the acquired display mode is not higher than that of the display mode before the change of the effect mode (step C553; N), that is, when the reliability of the acquired display mode is lower or the same. Determines whether the result is a big hit (step C554). When the result is not the big hit (step C554; N), the process proceeds to step C556. If the result is a big hit (step C554; Y), the acquired display mode is set (step C555), and the process proceeds to step C556.

When the reliability of the acquired display mode is lower or the same, the display mode displayed in the effect mode before the change is basically maintained. If the acquired display mode is less reliable, the player's interest may be reduced, and no change is made. However, if the result is a big hit, the acquired display mode is changed. As a result, it is informed that the change to the display mode with low reliability will be a big hit. Further, when the reliability of the acquired display mode is the same as before the change, the display mode is maintained regardless of whether or not it is a big hit, but since the player includes the possibility of being a big hit. It is possible to have a high expectation and to have a high expectation even when the display mode is not changed.

The display mode may be changed only when the reliability of the acquired display mode is higher than the determination in step C554. Further, the acquired display mode may be always set without performing the determination in steps C553 and C554.

Further, in the prefetch lottery process (step C321) in the prefetch variable system command process shown in FIG. 124, the notice effect is selected at the selection rate of each effect mode, but the notice effect is provided only for the effect modes that may be changed. It may be selected. For example, the notice effect may be selected only for the first mode and the second mode in the current effect mode. In addition, when it is known that the production mode is changed by changing the game state such as the end of the time saving state, the notice production is also selected for the first mode and the second mode in the changed production mode. It may be done.

From the above, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can acquire and set the notice effect that has been selected in advance according to the selection rate in the changed effect mode. Becomes As a result, it becomes possible to grasp the more detailed reliability by switching a plurality of times, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. Further, when the content suggested by the acquired notice production is more advantageous to the player than the content suggested by the notice production before the change, the obtained notice production is executed. Become.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification is capable of providing an advance notice that suggests a variation pattern.

FIG. 152(a) shows the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display and the contents shown in each display mode. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the system that determines the basic contents of the SP reach production differs depending on the production mode. For example, when SP1 reach is selected, SP1A reach of the A reach system is performed when it is the first mode of the low accuracy mode, and SP1B reach of the B reach system when it is the second mode of the low accuracy mode. Is done. Both SP1A reach and SP1B reach are SP1 reach, but the contents of the production are different. That is, when the system is different, the content of the effect is different even if the reach type is the same.

In the look-ahead notice effect that is performed with the decorative special figure start memory display, the change mode advance notice effect that announces the change mode such as the change pattern such as the reach type of the special figure change display game based on the target start memory and the change mode such as other effect contents is executed. It is possible. FIG. 152(b) shows an example of such a variation mode notice effect. In this example, in the case where the effect mode is the first mode of the probability variation mode, the example is shown in which the SP1 reach is set for the start memory having the second digestion order in the first start memory. When the production mode is the first mode of the probability variation mode, SP1C reach is performed as SP1 reach, so that “1C” is displayed in the variation mode notice production. In the case where another effect mode or SP2 reach or SP3 reach is performed, the display mode is as shown in FIG. 152(a).

When the effect mode is changed while such a variation mode notice effect is being performed, the contents of the variation mode notice effect are also changed to the contents in the changed effect mode. For example, in FIG. 153(a), in the case of the first mode of the probability variation mode, a variation mode advance notice effect indicating that SP1C reach is performed for the start memory having the second digestion order in the first start memory is performed. When the next game is started from this state and is changed to the second mode of the probability variation mode, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the SP1D reach notification in which the content of the variation mode notice effect corresponds to the changed effect mode Is changed to.

[Advance notice change processing]
In the gaming machine of this modification, the notice changing process shown in FIG. 154 is performed instead of the notice changing process shown in FIG. 148. In this notice change processing, first, it is determined whether or not the variation mode notice effect is being executed (step C561). Then, if the variation mode notice effect is not being executed (step C561; N), the notice change process is ended. If the variation mode notice effect is being executed (step C561; Y), the variation mode notice effect to be processed is selected (step C562).

Next, the variation mode after the effect mode change is acquired (step C563), and the variation mode notice effect corresponding to the acquired variation mode is set (step C564). Then, it is determined whether or not all the variation mode notice effects have been processed (step C565), and if not processed (step C565; N), the process returns to step C562. If the processing has been completed (step C565; Y), the advance notice changing processing ends.

From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can select different effects depending on the effect mode for the variable display game based on one starting memory, and the starting memory is selected in the current effect mode. It is possible to execute a variation mode preview effect that gives a preview of the effect, and when the effect mode is changed, it is possible to change the running variation mode announcement effect to one that announces the effect selected in the changed effect mode. Will be.

It should be noted that both the notice production as shown in FIG. 145 and the variation mode notice production as shown in FIG. 152 may be performed. In addition, the variation mode advance notice effect may be able to be ended when the effect mode is changed. Further, when selecting from a plurality of reach effects for one reach type, such as selecting from among a plurality of reach effects as SP1 reach in one effect mode, as in the case of the first modified example, due to a change in the effect mode. It is also possible to reselect the reach effect and change the variation mode notice effect. Alternatively, similarly to the second modification, when the start memory occurs, the reach effect for each effect mode is selected and selected. The variation mode notice effect may be changed based on the result.

Further, a display mode that does not depend on the type of effect mode may be provided in the variation mode notice effect. For example, a display mode for displaying "SP1" may be provided as a display mode for notifying that the SP1 reach is reached. In the case of such a display mode, the display mode may not be changed in accordance with the change of the effect mode. In addition, when there is a variation pattern that produces the same content as the variation pattern regardless of the effect pattern, a notice is given in a display mode that shows the content of the variation pattern. The display mode may not be changed due to the change.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can resume the initial operation interrupted by the power failure after the power failure is restored.

In the gaming machine of this modification, the effect control device 300 is provided with a storage unit capable of holding the stored contents even in the case of a power failure. The storage means capable of holding the stored contents even in the case of power failure may be constituted by a non-volatile RAM capable of holding the stored contents even if the electric power is not supplied, such as FeRAM323, or the stored contents when the electric power is not supplied. Even if it is a volatile RAM 322 that cannot be held, it may be configured to be able to hold the stored contents even when a power failure occurs by supplying power from a backup power source as in the game control device 100.

At least the information of the initial operation and the operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation can be stored in the storage means capable of holding the stored content even in the case of this power failure. If a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the interrupted initial operation can be resumed after the power failure is restored.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 155 is performed instead of the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 136. In this initial operation processing, it is first determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C121). In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation flag is not set in the process (step C7) of saving the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized in the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine. The power-on flag is set to. That is, the power-on flag is a flag set when the power is turned on. When this power-on flag is not present (step C121; N), the process proceeds to step C101. If the power-on flag is present (step C121; Y), it is determined whether the backup information is valid (step C122).

With respect to the storage means that can retain the stored contents even in the case of power failure, it is configured to determine whether the stored contents (backup information) when the power is turned on are valid. As this determination method, similar to the processing in the game control device 100, comparison of checksums at power-off and power-on can be mentioned. If the backup information is valid, the information stored in the RAM is used as it is, and if the backup information is not valid, the RAM is initialized. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a validity determination unit that determines whether the information stored in the storage unit (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) is valid when the power is restored.

When the backup information is valid (step C122; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an initial operation executing flag (step C124). If there is an initial operation executing flag (step C124; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, a power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted. Since the information before the occurrence of the power failure is correctly stored in the storage means, this information is used as it is to restart the initial operation that was interrupted after the power failure is restored. If there is no initial operation execution flag (step C124; N), the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, a power failure has occurred when the initial operation is not being executed, and the initial operation is performed based on the power-on this time.

On the other hand, when the backup information is not valid (step C122; N), the initial operation in progress flag is cleared (step C123) and the initial operation flag is set (step C125). In this case, since the information before the power failure occurred is not correctly stored in the storage means, the initial operation is restarted even if the power failure occurs during the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted. To do. When it is determined that the backup information is not valid in the process of checking the validity of the backup information, the storage content of the storage unit is initialized. Therefore, the initialization clears the initial operation in progress flag and the initial operation flag. May be set.

As backup information, the time when the power is turned off is stored based on the information of the RTC 338 so that the time when the power is turned off can be obtained by comparing with the time when the power is turned on. The interrupted initial operation can be restarted when the cutoff time is less than the predetermined time, and the initial operation is restarted from the beginning when the power cutoff time is more than the predetermined time even if the backup information is valid. May be.

From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the gaming machine to be generated, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect device (effect control device). 300) and storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) provided in the effect control means and capable of holding the stored contents even in the event of a power failure, and the effect control means performs the initial operation of the movable effect device based on power-on. It is possible to store the information of the initial operation and the operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation in the storage means, and if the power failure occurs during the execution of the initial operation and the initial operation is interrupted, the power is restored. The initial operation that was interrupted later can be resumed. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, a position detecting means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device is provided, and the effect control means is stored in the storage means when the power is restored. Equipped with a legitimacy determination means (production control device 300) for determining whether the stored information is legitimate, and the legitimacy determination means determines that the information stored in the storage means is not legitimate. If the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is performed. When is not in the normal detection state, it is possible to perform the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification can set the initial operation according to the amount of movement required for the returning operation.

[Initial operation processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 156 is replaced with the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 136. In this initial operation process, if there is an initial operation in-execution flag (step C108; Y), that is, if the initial operation is being executed, it is determined whether it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131). The completion timing of the special initial operation is the timing when the detection sensor is in the normal detection state by the special initial operation of returning to the initial position. When the special initial operation is performed for a plurality of movable effect devices, it is the timing when the detection sensor of each movable effect device is in the normal detection state.

If it is not the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131; N), the process proceeds to step C109. If it is the completion timing of the special initial operation (step C131; Y), it is determined whether the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount (step C132). To detect the amount of movement, it is possible to use the number of steps required for the stepping motor that operates the movable rendering device to return the movable rendering device to the initial position. In addition to this, the movement amount may be detected based on the time required to return to the initial position.

If the amount of movement to the initial position is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (step C132; Y), the process proceeds to step C109. In this case, there is a sufficient amount of movement in the return operation, and since the operation of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this return operation, the further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted as in the first embodiment. If the amount of movement to the initial position is not equal to or greater than the predetermined amount (step C132; N), the normal initial operation for the movable effect device is set (step C133). In this case, the amount of movement in the returning operation is not sufficient, and the normal initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not in the initial position, the initial operation table of FIG. 141(b) is set in the process of step C106. .. Then, first, the special initial operation of the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 is performed, and at the timing when this special initial operation is completed, it is determined whether or not the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than a predetermined amount. ..

If the amount of movement until returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 to the initial position is a predetermined amount or more, the initial operation table of FIG. 141(b) is used as it is. On the other hand, if the movement amount until returning the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, the third in the execution order of FIG. 141(b) in the process of step C133. The initial operation in the above is changed to the operation for performing the normal initial operation in the entire group A.

Similarly, when the special initial operation for the second lower movable member 770 is performed, it is determined whether the movement amount to the initial position is equal to or more than the predetermined amount at the timing when the special initial operation is completed. If the amount of movement until the second lower movable member 770 is returned to the initial position is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the initial operation table of FIG. 141(b) or the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930. The initial motion table changed by the special initial motion is used as it is. On the other hand, if the amount of movement until returning the second lower movable member 770 to the initial position is less than the predetermined amount, in the process of step C133, the fifth initial operation in the execution order of FIG. Change to one that normally performs initial operation.

When combined with the configuration of the fourth modified example described above, for a movable effect device whose detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is not in the normal detection state, the movable effect device is in the normal detection state from the backup information. It is also possible to calculate the motion amount required up to and set whether or not to perform the normal initial motion according to the calculation result. In the fourth modified example, at least the information of the initial operation and the operation state of the movable effect device in the initial operation can be stored, but the operation state of the movable effect device other than the initial operation can also be stored, and the movable effect device is normally used. It is also possible to be able to calculate the amount of movement required to reach the detection state.

[Initial operation processing]
In the case of combining with the fourth modification in this way, the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 157 is performed instead of the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 156. The processing of steps C121 to C125 is similar to that of the fourth modification. Further, in this initial operation process, when all the states of the detection sensors are not the normal detection state (step C104; N), after setting the initial operation table for performing the special initial operation according to the detection state (step C106), the normal operation is performed normally. A process for setting whether to perform the initial operation is performed.

In this process, first, the movement amount from the backup information to the initial position is calculated for the movable effect device that performs the special initial operation (step C135). In addition, when a plurality of movable effect devices are not at the initial position, calculation is performed for each movable effect device. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a calculation unit that calculates the amount of movement required for the movable effect device to reach the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage unit.

Next, it is determined whether all the movement amounts to the initial position are equal to or more than a predetermined amount (step C136). When all the movement amounts to the initial position are equal to or more than the predetermined amount (step C136; Y), the process proceeds to step C107. In this case, there is a sufficient amount of movement in the return operation, and since the operation of the movable effect device can be confirmed by this return operation, further initial operation of the movable effect device is omitted.

In addition, when the movement amount to the initial position is not all the predetermined amount or more (step C136; N), that is, when the movement amount to the initial position of at least one movable effect device is not the predetermined amount or more, the movement amount is the predetermined amount. The movable effect devices below are changed to the initial operation table that also performs the normal initial operation (step C137), and the process proceeds to step C107. In this case, there is a movable effect device in which the movement amount in the return operation is not sufficient, and the initial operation of the movable effect device is set to be performed again.

For example, when the third central movable effect member 920, the fourth central movable effect member 930, and the second lower movable member 770 are not in the initial position, the initial operation table of FIG. 141(b) is set in the process of step C106. .. Then, the amount of movement required to return to the initial position calculated for each is a predetermined amount or more for the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and for the second lower movable member 770. If it is less than the predetermined amount, the initial operation in the fifth execution order in FIG. 141(b) is changed to the initial operation table in which the normal initial operation in the entire group C is performed in the processing of step C137. To do.

If the backup information is not valid, the amount of movement is unknown, but in this case the amount of movement to the initial position is considered to be less than the predetermined amount, and Also, the normal initial operation is performed after the return operation. Also, in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the processing of steps C110 to C112 in FIG. 136 is omitted, but it may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 136.

From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the gaming machine to be generated, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and position detection means capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device (first). ~ Seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the operation of the movable effect device, and the effect control means is powered on. When the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation. If the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the operation is not the normal detection state, the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached, and the operation amount required until the normal detection state is reached is a predetermined amount or more. In some cases, the operation is regarded as an initial operation, and a normal initial operation is not performed for the movable effect device, and when the operation amount required to reach the normal detection state is less than a predetermined amount, the operation is terminated after the end of the operation. This means that the movable effect device normally performs the initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, the movable effect device is provided with a plurality of movable effect devices, the position detection means for each movable effect device, the effect control means, the detection result by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation is a normal detection state Performs a normal initial operation as an initial operation. For a movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state by the position detection means before the start of the initial operation, the movable effect device is operated until the normal detection state is reached, and the normal detection is performed. If the amount of movement required to reach the state is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount, the operation is set as the initial operation of the movable effect device and the normal initial operation is not performed for the movable effect device, and the normal detection state is set. When the required operation amount is less than the predetermined amount, it means that the normal initial operation is performed on the movable effect device after the end of the operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

In addition, the production control means includes a storage means (RAM 322, FeRAM 323) capable of holding the stored contents even in the case of a power failure, can store the operating state of the movable production device in the storage means, and is a position detection means before the start of the initial operation. When the detection result by the above is not the normal detection state, the calculation means (production control device 300) is provided, which calculates the amount of movement required until the movable effect device enters the normal detection state based on the information stored in the storage means. If the amount of movement calculated by is greater than or equal to a predetermined amount, the operation means operates the movable effect device until the normal detection state is set as an initial operation, and the normal initial operation is not performed for the movable effect device, and is calculated by the calculation means. If the amount of motion performed is less than the predetermined amount, it means that the normal initial motion is performed after operating the movable effect device until the normal detection state is achieved. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is adapted to perform an initial operation on the basis of receiving control information from the game control means.

[Single-shot command processing]
In the gaming machine of the present modification, the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. 158 is performed instead of the single-shot command processing shown in FIG. In this single-shot command processing, when it is determined that MODE corresponds to the model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing (step C262) is performed to rewrite the internal information to the model information corresponding to the command. After that, the initial operation flag is set (step C141), the power-on flag is cleared (step C142), and the single-shot system command processing ends. The model designation command is a command that is always transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 first when the power of the game machine is turned on, and the control information at the time of power supply is transmitted from the game control device 100 based on the power being turned on. It is what makes up.

In the gaming machine of the present modification, the initial operation flag is set by the process of saving the initial value at power-on in the area to be initialized in the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the game machine (step C7). No, only set here. Therefore, the initial operation is performed only when the model designation command is received. Moreover, if the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command, the initial operation is not set in the initial operation process, and the initial operation is not performed. Further, in the gaming machine of the present modified example, the initial operation flag is saved in the area to be initialized in the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine (step C7). Set the power-on flag that indicates that the power has been turned on.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Also, instead of the received command analysis processing shown in FIG. 121, the received command analysis processing shown in FIG. 159 is performed. In this received command analysis processing, the return operation processing (step C150) is performed when a correct command is received.

[Return operation processing]
FIG. 160 shows the return operation process (step C150) in the received command analysis process described above. In this restoration operation process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a power-on flag (step C151), and if there is no power-on flag (step C151; N), the restoration operation process ends. If there is a power-on flag (step C151; Y), the power-on flag is cleared (step C152), the state of the detection sensor is acquired (step C153), and the states of the detection sensors are all normal detection states. It is determined whether there is any (step C154). Then, when all the states of the detection sensors are in the normal detection state (step C154; Y), the return operation process is ended. If all the states of the detection sensors are not in the normal detection state (step C154; N), a special initial operation (return operation) of the movable effect device that is not in the normal detection state is set (step C155), and the return operation process is ended. ..

As described above, the power-on flag is a flag that is set based on the power-on of the effect control device 300 based on the power-on of the gaming machine, and the model control command that the effect control device 300 first receives from the game control device 100. It is cleared when it is received. Also, when the model designation command is received, the initial operation flag is set and the initial operation of the movable effect device is performed.

However, if the production control device 300 misses the model designation command for some reason, the initial operation flag is not set and the power-on flag remains set. When a command other than the model designation command is received in such a situation, a returning operation of returning the movable effect device that is not at the initial position to the initial position is performed. As a result, when the model specification command is missed when the power is turned on, the initial operation is omitted and only the return operation is performed, and it is possible not to delay the time when the game can be started normally by the execution of the initial operation. It is possible to perform the returning operation so that the movable effect device is not in an abnormal position and does not affect the game.

The commands that trigger the return operation are all commands other than the model designation command, but they may be limited to specific commands and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the return operation process (step C150) may be performed only when the predetermined control information regarding the special figure variation display game is received. The predetermined control information relating to the special figure variation display game includes a variation type command and a symbol type command which are commands transmitted at the start of the special figure variation display game.

By thus performing the returning operation at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is possible to prevent the execution of the special figure variation display game from being affected by the movable effect device being in the abnormal position. That is, when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed, and when the special figure variation display game is started in a state where the movable effect device is not at the initial position, the effect is movable. The effect device can be returned to the initial position so as not to affect the execution of the special figure variation display game.

In addition to this, as the predetermined control information regarding the special figure variation display game, a symbol stop command, a command regarding increase/decrease of the number of holdings, a command regarding the result of the prefetch processing of the holding, a big hit system command, etc. can be arbitrarily selected. .. Further, when only the return operation is performed without performing the initial operation, the initial operation may be performed based on the fact that the customer wait state is entered. By doing so, the initial operation can be performed without affecting the execution of the special figure variation display game.

Moreover, when the effect control device 300 cannot receive the model designation command and the initial operation is not performed, and when the movable effect device is not at the initial position, when the command related to the special figure variation display game is received, In the special figure variation display game, the movable effect device or all movable effect devices may not be operated. In this case, when it is known that the special figure variation display game has ended, a return operation may be performed to return to the initial position so that the movable effect device can be operated from the next special figure variation display game. To know that the special figure variation display game has ended is, for example, when a symbol stop command for the special figure variation display game is received, or when a command regarding the start of the next special figure variation display game is received. ..

From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the gaming machine to be generated, a game control means (game control device 100) for integrally controlling the game, and a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770,) for performing a predetermined effect operation. Movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860, first central movable effect member 900, second central movable effect member 910, third central movable effect member 920, fourth central movable effect member 930. ), and position detection means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device, and movable effect based on control information from the game control means. The production control means for controlling the operation of the device (production control device 300) is provided, and the production control means is an initial stage of the movable production device based on the control information when the power is turned on, which is transmitted from the game control means when the power is turned on. If the detection result by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is a predetermined normal detection state, the normal initial operation is performed as the initial operation, and the position detection before the start of the initial operation is performed. When the detection result by the means is not the normal detection state, it is possible to perform the special initial operation in which a part of the normal initial operation is omitted as the initial operation instead of the normal initial operation. Therefore, the time required for the initial operation can be shortened.

Further, if the effect control means does not receive the power-on control information transmitted from the game control means based on the power-on, it means that the initial operation of the movable effect device is not performed. Therefore, when the start timing of the initial operation is missed, the time until the game can be started can be shortened by not performing the initial operation.

Further, the effect control means is configured to perform the operation of returning the movable effect device to the initial position when receiving the predetermined control information regarding the game from the game control means. Therefore, when the initial operation is omitted and the game is started, the movable effect device that is not in the normal position can be returned to the initial position.

[Seventh Modification]
Next, a seventh modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. In the gaming machine of the present modification, the movable accessory device can operate in a wider operating range than the operating range in the game.

As shown in FIG. 161, the second lower movable member 770 is adapted to move from the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a) to the operation completion position shown in FIG. 161(b) in the effect of the game. In the effect, it rotates in the range of FIG. 161(a) to FIG. 161(b).

In the gaming machine of this modification, the second lower movable member 770 is rotatable from the state of FIG. 161(b) to the maximum operating position shown in FIG. 161(c), and the second lower movable member 770 The actual rotatable range is the range from FIG. 161(a) to FIG. 161(c). That is, the operation range in the game effect is narrower than the operable range. Note that the range of FIGS. 161(b) to 161(c) is not such that the structure is rotatable simply because there is play in the structure, and the production control device 300 operates by controlling the motor 734. It is a range that can be rotated. It should be noted that in this example, the fact that the maximum operating position has been reached can be detected by the fact that the second light shielding plate 773 retracts from the detection portion of the second detection sensor 782 and the detection state changes from OFF to ON.

In the normal initial operation of the second lower movable member 770, the second lower movable member 770 is moved from the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a) to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161(c) and then moved to the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a). It is designed to return. By doing so, the operation in the operation range in the game effect can be surely guaranteed by the initial operation.

Although the second lower movable member 770 is shown here, the operation range of the other movable effect devices in the game effect is similarly narrower than the operable range, and the initial operation is performed up to the maximum operation position. You can However, in the case of a configuration in which the first central movable effect member 900 and the second central movable effect member 910, and the third central movable effect member 920 and the fourth central movable effect member 930 are operated at the same time to the maximum operation position, they interfere with each other. Sets the order of operations in the initial operation so as not to interfere with each other.

Further, when the special initial operation is performed when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), first, the operation is opposite to the direction of returning to the initial position. Then, after moving to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161(c), it may be returned to the initial position shown in FIG. 161(a). In addition, the operation to the maximum operation position shown in FIG. 161(c) in the initial operation is performed only in the special initial operation, and in the case of the normal initial operation, it is performed in the range of FIG. 161(a) to (b). Is also good.

Further, when the detection result by the second detection sensor 782 before the start of the initial operation is not the normal detection state (predetermined detection state), the special initial operation for returning to the initial position is performed. In case that it takes some time to return to the initial position due to some trouble, it is equipped with measuring means to measure the time to return to the initial position, and if the measurement result is longer than the predetermined time, then the maximum operating position You may make it work up to. The predetermined time referred to here is the time required to return from the maximum operating position to the initial position, and if it is longer than this time, it is considered that there is a problem such as the movable effect device being caught, so the initial time After returning to the position, move to the maximum operating position and check the operation. Further, in this case, even when the movable effect device is slowly operated so as to reach the maximum operating position over a time longer than the predetermined time when operating to the maximum operating position after returning to the initial position. good. It should be noted that the present invention is also applicable to the above-described first embodiment and other modifications in which the operation range in the game effect and the operation range in the initial operation match.

From the above, based on the establishment of the start condition, a game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed, and when the result of the game is a special result, a special game state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player is set. In the gaming machine to be generated, a movable effect device (first lower movable member 740, 741, second lower movable member 770, movable member unit 820, first upper movable member 848, second upper movable member 860) which performs a predetermined effect operation. , The first central movable effect member 900, the second central movable effect member 910, the third central movable effect member 920, and the fourth central movable effect member 930, and effect control means for controlling the operation of the movable effect device (effect control device). 300), and the movable effect device is operable in a wider range than the operation range in the effect of the game, the effect control means is configured to perform the initial operation of the movable effect device based on the power-on, It is possible to make the operation range of the movable effect device in the initial operation wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the game effect. Therefore, by making the operation range of the movable effect device in the initial operation wider than the operation range of the movable effect device in the game effect, it is possible to reliably ensure the operation in the operation range in the game effect.

Further, the position detecting means (first to seventh detection sensors 781, 782, 811, 812, 858, 889, 897) capable of detecting the position of the movable effect device is provided, and detection by the position detecting means before the start of the initial operation is performed. When the result is not the predetermined detection state, it is possible to perform the initial motion in a motion range wider than the motion range of the movable effect device in the game effect. Therefore, when the movable effect device is in an abnormal state, it can be confirmed that the operation in the operation range in the game effect is possible, and the operation in the operation range in the game effect can be reliably guaranteed.

[Eighth Modification]
Next, an eighth modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted, and mainly different The part will be described. The gaming machine of the present modification can execute a plurality of types of notice effects, and the processing when the effect mode is changed differs depending on the notice effect.

FIG. 162 shows an example of how the notice effect is executed in this modification. In the state shown in FIG. 162(a), the special figure variation display game is finished in the second mode of the probability variation mode and the four first starting memories are present. Among these, when the first starting memory having the fourth digestion order occurs, as a performance for suggesting or notifying the information of the special figure changing display game based on the first starting memory, a continuous operation over a plurality of special figure changing display games is performed. Execution of continuous production, which is a production, has been decided.

As this continuous effect, a symbol stop notice is determined in which the stop result of the decorative special map change display game is the specific result mode over a plurality of special figure change display games. Also, as another continuous effect, execution of a character notice in which the character 99 appears in a plurality of special figure variable display games is also determined. The symbol stop notice and the character notice form a first notice effect performed according to the display mode of the decorative special figure variable display game.

Further, with respect to the first starting memory having the fourth digestion order, the hold advance notice effect that is the look-ahead effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is performed. It should be noted that a pre-reading effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is also performed for the first start memories having the first and third digestion orders. This hold notice effect is a second notice effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display.

When the next special figure variation display game is started, first, as shown in FIG. 162(b), the first character announcement of the appearance of the character 99 is performed. When the special figure variation display game ends, as shown in FIG. 162(c), the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is “123” which is the specific result mode as the first time of the symbol stop notice. To be done. Even in the next special figure variation display game, the character notice and the symbol stop notice are continuously executed. As shown in FIG. 162(d), the second character notice in which the character 99 appears is given, When the special figure variation display game ends, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is set to "123" which is the specific result mode as shown in FIG. 162(e) as the second time of the symbol stop notice.

Further, in the next special figure variation display game, the character notice and the symbol stop notice are continuously executed. As shown in FIG. 162(f), the third character notice in which the character 99 appears appears. When the special figure variable display game ends, the result mode of the decorative special figure variable display game is set to "123" which is the specific result mode as shown in FIG. 162(g) as the third time of the symbol stop notice. It

Then, in the special figure variation display game that is the subject of advance notice, as shown in FIG. 162(h), the fourth advance notice of the character 99 in which the character 99 appears appears. After that, the result of the special figure variation display game is derived as shown in FIG. 162(i). Here, as a result, a deviation result is derived. It is to be noted that the symbol stop advance notice is an effect produced according to the stop result, and therefore is not executed in the special target change display game of the advance notice.

As for the second notice effect for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display, as shown in FIGS. 162(a) to (g), the special figure changing display game based on the starting memory of the target is generated. Can be continued until the start of. Further, as shown in FIGS. 162(h) and 162(i), in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory of the target, the effect can be continuously executed on the running memory display unit 84.

FIG. 163 shows an example of a case where the effect mode is changed during execution of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. In this example, as in the case of FIG. 162, at the time of FIG. 163(a), the special figure variation display game is finished in the second mode of the probability variation mode and the four first starting memories are present. There is. Among these, when the first starting memory having the fourth digestion order occurs, as a performance for suggesting or notifying the information of the special figure changing display game based on the first starting memory, a continuous operation over a plurality of special figure changing display games is performed. Execution of continuous production, which is a production, has been decided. Here, execution of a character notice, a symbol stop notice, and a hold notice effect is determined as continuous effects.

Then, up to FIG. 163(d), the notice effect is executed similarly to FIG. 162(d). After that, as shown in FIG. 162(d), the mode changing operation is performed in the state where the character notice is being executed. In the gaming machine of the present modification, it is possible to immediately change the effect mode even during the variable display, and the effect mode is the probability change mode as shown in FIG. 163(e) in accordance with the mode changing operation. Is changed to the first mode.

With the change of the effect mode, the character notice being executed ends, and the display of the character 99 ends as shown in FIG. 163(e). In addition, the character notice that was planned to be continuously executed in the subsequent special map change display game is also ended, and as shown in FIG. 163(g), the character notice is also announced in the next special map change display game. It will not be done. Further, the symbol stop notice is also ended due to the change of the effect mode, and as shown in FIG. 163(f), the stop result at the end of the special figure variation display game is not the specific result mode “123”, which is the result mode. It is said that Further, the symbol stop notice that was planned to be continuously executed in the subsequent special symbol variation display game is also finished. That is, the first notice effect performed in the display mode of the decorative special figure variable display game ends at the same time when the effect mode is changed by the mode changing operation.

On the other hand, as for the second notice effect for changing the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display, as in the first embodiment described above, the special figure variable display game next to the special figure variable display game in which the mode changing operation is performed. It is supposed to end with the start of. Therefore, at the time of FIGS. 163(e) and (f), the notice effect in which the decorative special figure starting memory display is a white star is continuously executed, and at the time of FIG. 163(g), the notice effect is finished. Decorative special drawing start memory display is a white circle. Here, with respect to the starting memory having the first digestion order at the time of FIG. 163(g), the result is dissimilar as in the first embodiment, and the reliability after the production mode change is lower, so the advance notice is given. Although the production is finished, it may be finished regardless of the result or the reliability. Further, all the pending notice effects may be ended, or only the specific notice effects may be ended.

In the above description, the stop result of the decorative special figure variable display game is set as the specific result mode (eg, “123”) for the symbol stop notification, but the specific result mode is not limited to this. For example, it may be a specific result mode by stopping the specific identification information that is not used in the display of the normal stop result, or by specifying a different color of the identification information from the display of the normal stop result It may be an aspect. Further, the symbol stop notice and the character notice can be executed at the same time, but it is also possible to execute only one of them.

Further, although the notice effect according to the display mode of the special figure variation display game is the first notice effect and the notice effect for changing the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display is the second notice effect, the present invention is not limited to this. .. When the mode changing operation is performed, the end timing of the notice effect is different, one of which is the first notice effect and the other is the second notice effect, and the type of the corresponding notice effect can be arbitrarily set. ..

Also, the end timing of each notice effect can be arbitrarily set in addition to the above timing. For example, while the pending notice effect ends at the same time as the mode changing operation, the character effect may be executed until the end of the special figure variation display game in which the mode changing operation is performed. Further, the character notice is a notice effect that suggests or informs the look-ahead result by the pre-determination means, but it is a notice effect that suggests or notifies the result of the determination made for the special figure variation display game at the start of the special figure variation display game. You can have it. Further, the character notice is an example of notice effect executed during variable display, and the character 99 may not appear.

Regarding the symbol stop notice, it is arranged to end at the same time as the mode changing operation, but the timing at which the player can know that it has actually ended is when the mode changing operation has ended. It is time, and it can be said that the end time of the change of the special figure change display game is the end time of the effect. That is, in the above-described example, the character notice is the first notice effect that ends simultaneously with the mode changing operation, and the hold notice effect is for the special figure changing display game next to the special figure changing display game in which the mode changing operation is performed. It can be said that it is the second notice effect which ends with the start, and the symbol stop notice can be said to be the third notice effect which ends at the end of the variation of the special figure variation display game in which the mode changing operation was performed.

Further, in the above description, the case where the second mode is changed to the first mode in the probability variation mode has been described, but the same effect modes as those in the first embodiment are provided, and these effect modes also have a notice effect associated with the change. It is possible to control termination as well. That is, the same control is performed when the effect modes are mutually changed among the probability variation mode, the low accuracy mode, the time saving mode, and the latent mode, or when the first mode and the second mode are mutually changed within each effect mode. It is possible.

From the above, in the gaming machine that executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the satisfaction of the start condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, The production control means (production control device 300) and the operation means (production button 25, touch panel 29) capable of accepting the operation by the player are provided, and the production control means is one of a plurality of production modes. It is configured to select a mode and execute a game effect in accordance with the effect mode, and the effect mode can be changed in response to a mode changing operation being performed by the operating means. It is possible to execute an effect and a second notice effect different from the first notice effect, the first notice effect can be ended at the same time when the effect mode is changed by the mode changing operation, and the second notice effect is the mode change. The game can be ended when the game next to the operated game is started. Therefore, it is possible to set a notice execution mode according to the effect mode, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game. Further, it is possible to set an appropriate end timing depending on the execution mode of the notice production.

A starting memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing a starting memory that is a right to execute the game up to a predetermined upper limit based on the establishment of a starting condition; and a display device 41 capable of displaying information regarding a game, The effect control means can display a decoration game (decoration special figure variation display game) corresponding to the game and a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display) corresponding to start memory on the display device 41. The first notice effect is performed in the display mode of the decoration game, and the second notice effect is performed in the display mode of the start memory display. Further, the first notice effect is to be continuously performed over a plurality of games. Therefore, an appropriate end timing can be set depending on the execution mode of the notice production.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines using the game balls. Further, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, but includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls. Further, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, it should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplifications in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

10 Gaming machine 300 Production control device (production control means)
740, 741 First lower movable member (movable effect device)
770 Second lower movable member (movable production device)
820 Movable member unit (movable performance device)
848 1st upper movable member (movable production device)
860 Second upper movable member (movable production device)
900 First central movable effect member (movable effect device)
910 Second central movable effect member (movable effect device)
920 Third central movable effect member (movable effect device)
930 Fourth central movable effect member (movable effect device)

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A movable effect device that performs a predetermined effect operation,
And a production control means for controlling the operation of the movable production device,
The effect control means,
It is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable rendering device based on power-on,
There are a plurality of movable production devices,
The initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation in which the movable effect device that operates is different from the first initial operation.
When the first initial operation is completed normally, the second initial operation is not performed,
When the first initial operation is not normally completed, the second initial operation is executed,
The first initial operation and the second initial operation are operations that can be executed in a game effect,
A game machine characterized in that the first initial operation is an operation that suggests a more advantageous state for a player than the second initial operation. In a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
A movable effect device that performs a predetermined effect operation,
And a production control means for controlling the operation of the movable production device,
The effect control means,
It is configured to perform an initial operation of the movable rendering device based on power-on,
The initial operation includes a first initial operation and a second initial operation different from the first initial operation,
In the initial operation, if the first initial operation ends normally, the second initial operation is not performed,
If the first initial operation is not normally completed, the second initial operation can be executed.
The effect control means,
When the first initial operation is not normally ended in the initial operation but the second initial operation is normally ended, when an operation corresponding to the first initial operation is selected in the game effect, , A game machine characterized by performing an operation corresponding to the second initial operation in place of the operation corresponding to the first initial operation.